Canon 0107C001 Handleiding
- Categorie
- Camcorders
- Type
- Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
Camera User Guide
English
Switching Between Pages
Click the button on the top of the screen.
ç
Contents
: return to the Contents.
● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety
Precautions” (
=
18) section, before using the camera.
● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera
properly.
● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future.
© CANON INC. 2015 CDJ-E636-010
2
ç Contents
Initial Information
Package Contents
Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package.
If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer.
Camera
Battery Pack
NB-11LH*
Battery Charger
CB-2LF/CB-2LFE
Wrist Strap Lens Cap (with cord)
* Do not peel off the battery pack label.
● Printed matter is also included.
● A memory card is not included (
=
3).
Before Use
3
ç Contents
Compatible Memory Cards
The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used,
regardless of capacity.
● SD memory cards*
● SDHC memory cards*
● SDXC memory cards*
● Eye-Fi cards
* Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have
been veried to work with the camera.
About Eye-Fi Cards
This product is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions
(including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi
card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that an approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many
countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not
permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for
use in the area, please check with the card manufacturer.
4
ç Contents
Part Names and Conventions in
This Guide
(
3
)
(
6
)
(
8
) (
9
)
(
7
)
(
1
)(
2
)(
3
) (
4
) (
5
)
(1) Zoom lever
Shooting: [
(telephoto)] /
[
(wide angle)]
Playback: [
(magnify)] /
[
(index)]
(2) Shutter button
(3) Strap mount
(4) Power button
(5) Flash
(6) Lamp
(7) Lens
(8) Tripod socket
(9) Memory card/battery cover
5
ç Contents
● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in
brackets.
●
: Important information you should know
●
: Notes and tips for expert camera use
●
=
xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx”
represents a page number)
● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default
settings.
● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply
referred to as the “memory card”.
● The symbols “
Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles
indicate how the function is used—whether for still images or
movies.
6
ç Contents
(
8
)
(
9
)
(
11
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
1
) (
6
) (
7
)
(
5
)
(
4
) (
15
)(
14
) (
16
)
(
3
)(
2
)
(
10
)
(1) Speaker
(2) Microphone
(3) AV OUT (Audio/video output) /
DIGITAL terminal
(4) Screen (LCD monitor)
(5) DC coupler cable port
(6) Indicator
(7) [
(Playback)] button
(8) Movie button
(9) [
(Auto)] button
(10)
[ (Exposure compensation)] /
Up button
(11) FUNC./SET button
(12) [
(Flash)] / Right button
(13) [
(Self-timer)] / [ (Single-
image erase)] / Down button
(14) [
(Focusing range)] / Left
button
(15) [
(Display)] button
(16) [
] button
● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding
camera buttons on which they appear, or which they resemble.
● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by
icons.
[
] Up button (10) on back [ ] Right button (12) on back
[ ] Left button (14) on back [ ] Down button (13) on back
7
ç Contents
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information
● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the
images were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc.,
its subsidiaries and afliates, and its distributors are not liable
for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction
of a camera or accessory, including memory cards, that result
in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded in a
way that is machine readable.
● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use.
Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright
law, and note that even for personal use, photography
may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some
performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial settings.
● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In
case of camera problems while abroad, return to the area of
purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help
Desk.
● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high-
precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of
the pixels meet design specications, in rare cases some pixels
may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This
does not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images.
● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic lm for
protection against scratches during shipment. If covered,
remove the lm before using the camera.
● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may
become warm. This does not indicate damage.
8
ç Contents
Table of Contents
Before Use
Initial Information ...............2
Package Contents .................2
Compatible Memory Cards ... 3
About Eye-Fi Cards ......3
Part Names and Conventions
in This Guide ..........................4
Preliminary Notes and Legal
Information .............................7
Common Camera
Operations ...........................15
Safety Precautions .............. 18
Basic Guide
Basic Operations ..............24
Initial Preparations .............. 25
Attaching
Accessories ................ 25
Holding the Camera ... 26
Charging the Battery
Pack .............................26
Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory
Card ............................. 28
Removing the Battery
Pack and Memory
Card .........................30
Setting the Date and
Time .............................31
Changing the Date and
Time .........................32
Display Language ......34
Trying the Camera Out ........36
Shooting
(Smart Auto) ................36
Viewing ........................39
Erasing Images ........41
Advanced Guide
1 Camera Basics ..............42
On/Off ...................................43
Power-Saving Features
(Auto Power Down) .... 44
Power Saving in
Shooting Mode ........44
Power Saving in
Playback Mode ........44
Shutter Button .....................45
Shooting Display Options ..46
Using the FUNC. Menu ........47
Using the Menu Screen .......49
Indicator Display .................51
Clock .....................................52
2 Auto Mode .....................53
Shooting with Camera-
Determined Settings ...........54
Shooting
(Smart Auto) ................54
9
ç Contents
Still Images/Movies ..58
Still Images ..............58
Movies ..................... 59
Scene Icons ................ 60
Image Stabilization
Icons ............................62
On-Screen Frames ..... 63
Common, Convenient
Features ...............................64
Zooming In Closer on
Subjects
(Digital Zoom) ............. 64
Using the Self-Timer ..66
Using the Self-Timer to
Avoid Camera
Shake ......................67
Customizing the
Self-Timer ................ 68
Adding a Date
Stamp .......................... 69
Continuous
Shooting ......................71
Image Customization
Features ...............................72
Changing the Aspect
Ratio ............................ 72
Changing Image
Resolution (Size) ........ 73
Guidelines for Choosing
Resolution Based on
Paper Size (for 4:3
Images) ....................73
Changing Movie Image
Quality ......................... 74
Helpful Shooting Features ..75
Displaying Grid
Lines ............................75
Magnifying the Area in
Focus ...........................76
Checking for Closed
Eyes .............................77
Customizing Camera
Operation .............................79
Deactivating the AF-
Assist Beam ................79
Deactivating the Red-Eye
Reduction Lamp ......... 80
Changing the Image
Display Style after
Shots ........................... 81
Changing the Image
Display Period after
Shots .......................81
Changing the Screen
Displayed after
Shots .......................82
3 Other Shooting
Modes .............................83
Brightness / Color
Customization (Live View
Control) ................................84
Specic Scenes ................... 85
Applying Special Effects ....87
Shooting with a
Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect) .........88
Shots Resembling
Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect) ........89
10
ç Contents
Playback Speed and
Estimated Playback
Time (for One-Minute
Clips) .......................90
Shooting with a
Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)....91
Shooting in
Monochrome ...............92
Special Modes for Other
Purposes .............................. 93
Using the Face Self-
Timer............................93
Shooting Long
Exposures (Long
Shutter) .......................95
4 P Mode ...........................97
Shooting in Program AE
([P] Mode) ............................. 98
Image Brightness
(Exposure) ............................99
Adjusting Image
Brightness
(Exposure
Compensation) ........... 99
Locking Image
Brightness / Exposure
(AE Lock) ..................100
Changing the Metering
Method ......................101
Changing the ISO
Speed ........................102
Correcting Image
Brightness
(i-Contrast) ................103
Image Colors ......................104
Adjusting White
Balance .....................104
Custom White
Balance ..................105
Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors) .... 105
Custom Color .........107
Shooting Range and
Focusing ............................108
Shooting Close-Ups
(Macro) ...................... 108
Shooting Distant
Subjects (Innity) ..... 109
Digital Tele-
Converter .................. 109
Changing the AF Frame
Mode .......................... 110
Center .................... 110
Face AiAF ...............111
Choosing Subjects
to Focus On
(Tracking AF) ......... 112
Shooting with Servo
AF .......................... 114
Changing the Focus
Setting ....................... 115
Shooting with the AF
Lock ........................... 116
Flash ................................... 117
Changing the Flash
Mode .......................... 117
Auto ....................... 117
On .......................... 118
Slow Synchro ......... 118
Off .......................... 118
11
ç Contents
Shooting with the FE
Lock ........................... 119
Other Settings ....................120
Changing the
Compression Ratio
(Image Quality) ......... 120
Changing the IS Mode
Settings ..................... 121
Shooting Movies with
Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before
Shooting ................122
5 Playback Mode ............ 123
Viewing ............................... 124
Switching Display
Modes ........................127
Overexposure Warning
(for Image
Highlights) ..............128
Histogram .............. 128
Browsing and Filtering
Images ................................ 129
Navigating through
Images in an Index ... 129
Finding Images Matching
Specied
Conditions ................130
Image Viewing Options ..... 132
Magnifying Images ...132
Viewing
Slideshows ...............133
Changing Slideshow
Settings ..................134
Auto Playback of
Related Images
(Smart Shufe) .........135
Protecting Images .............137
Using the Menu ........138
Choosing Images
Individually ...............138
Selecting a Range .... 139
Protecting All Images at
Once .......................... 141
Clearing All Protection
at Once ..................141
Erasing Images .................. 142
Erasing Multiple Images
at Once ...................... 143
Choosing a Selection
Method ...................143
Choosing Images
Individually .............144
Selecting a Range . 145
Specifying All Images
at Once ..................146
Rotating Images ................147
Using the Menu ........148
Deactivating Auto
Rotation .....................149
Tagging Images as
Favorites ............................150
Using the Menu ........150
Editing Still Images ...........152
Resizing Images ....... 152
Cropping ................... 154
Changing Image Color
Tones (My Colors) .... 156
Correcting Image
Brightness
(i-Contrast) ................157
12
ç Contents
Correcting Red-Eye ..158
Editing Movies ................... 160
6 Setting Menu ...............162
Adjusting Basic Camera
Functions ...........................163
Silencing Camera
Operations ................ 163
Adjusting the
Volume .......................164
Hiding Hints and
Tips ............................164
Date and Time ...........165
World Clock ..............165
Lens Retraction
Timing ........................166
Using Eco Mode ....... 167
Power-Saving
Adjustment ...............168
Screen Brightness ...169
Hiding the Start-Up
Screen ....................... 169
Formatting Memory
Cards ......................... 170
Low-Level
Formatting .............171
File Numbering ......... 172
Date-Based Image
Storage ......................173
Checking Certication
Logos ........................174
Display Language ....174
Adjusting Other
Settings ..................... 175
Restoring Defaults ... 175
7 Accessories .................176
System Map .......................177
Optional Accessories ........179
Power Supplies ........179
Flash Unit ..................180
Other Accessories ....181
Printer ........................181
Using Optional
Accessories .......................182
Playback on a TV ......182
Powering the Camera
with Household
Power ........................184
Using the Software ............ 186
Checking Your Computer
Environment ............. 186
Installing the
Software .................... 187
Saving Images to a
Computer .................. 188
Printing Images .................191
Easy Print ..................191
Conguring Print
Settings ..................... 193
Cropping Images
before Printing ....... 195
Choosing Paper Size
and Layout before
Printing ..................196
Available Layout
Options .................. 197
Printing ID Photos ..198
Printing Movie
Scenes .......................199
13
ç Contents
Movie Printing
Options .................. 199
Adding Images to the
Print List (DPOF) ...... 200
Conguring Print
Settings ..................200
Setting Up Printing for
Individual Images ...202
Setting Up Printing for a
Range of Images ... 203
Setting Up Printing for
All Images ..............203
Clearing All Images
from the Print List ..204
Printing Images Added
to the Print List
(DPOF) .................. 204
Adding Images to a
Photobook ................205
Choosing a Selection
Method ...................205
Adding Images
Individually .............206
Adding All Images to a
Photobook .............207
Removing All Images
from a Photobook .. 207
Using an Eye-Fi Card ........208
Checking Connection
Information ...............209
Disabling Eye-Fi
Transfer ..................... 210
8 Appendix ......................211
Troubleshooting ................212
On-Screen Messages ........ 218
On-Screen Information .....221
Shooting (Information
Display) ..................... 221
Battery Level ..........222
Playback (Detailed
Information
Display) ..................... 223
Summary of Movie
Control Panel .........224
Functions and Menu
Tables .................................225
Functions Available in
Each Shooting
Mode ..........................225
FUNC. Menu ..............227
Shooting Tab .............230
Set Up Tab .................235
Playback Tab.............236
Print Tab ....................237
Playback Mode FUNC.
Menu ..........................237
Handling Precautions .......238
Specications .................... 239
Camera
Specications ...........239
Digital Zoom Focal
Length (35mm lm
equivalent) .............240
Number of Shots/
Recording Time,
Playback Time ....... 240
Number of Shots per
Memory Card .........241
Recording Time per
Memory Card .........242
14
ç Contents
Flash Range .......... 242
Shooting Range .....243
Continuous Shooting
Speed .................... 243
Shutter Speed ........243
Aperture .................243
Battery Pack
NB-11LH ................244
Battery Charger
CB-2LF/CB-2LFE ..244
Index ................................... 245
Trademarks and
Licensing ...............250
Disclaimer ..............250
15
ç Contents
Common Camera Operations
Shoot
● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode)
-
=
54
Shooting people well
Portraits
(
=
85)
Against Snow
(
=
85)
Matching specic scenes
Low Light
(
=
85)
Fireworks
(
=
85)
Applying special effects
Vivid Colors
(
=
87)
Poster Effect
(
=
87)
Fish-Eye Effect
(
=
88)
Miniature Effect
(
=
89)
Toy Camera Effect
(
=
91)
Monochrome
(
=
92)
16
ç Contents
● While adjusting image settings (Live View Control)
-
=
84
● Focus on faces
-
=
54,
=
85,
=
111
● Without using the ash (Flash Off)
-
=
54
● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer)
-
=
66,
=
93
● Add a date stamp
-
=
69
View
● View images (Playback Mode)
-
=
124
● Automatic playback (Slideshow)
-
=
133
● On a TV
-
=
182
● On a computer
-
=
186
● Browse through images quickly
-
=
129
● Erase images
-
=
142
18
ç Contents
Safety Precautions
● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety
precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is
used correctly.
● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and
other persons from being injured or incurring property damage.
● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately
sold accessories you use.
Warning
Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death.
● Do not trigger the ash in close proximity to people’s eyes.
Exposure to the intense light produced by the ash could damage
eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from
infants when using the ash.
● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants.
A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord
around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation.
● Use only recommended power sources.
● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product.
● Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one.
● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts.
● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as
when dropped.
19
ç Contents
● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a
strange smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally.
● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or
thinner to clean the product.
● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign
objects inside.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside,
remove the battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately.
● Do not look through the viewnder (if your model has one) at
intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an
intense articial light source.
This could damage your eyesight.
● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged
in.
This could result in electrical shock or re. Immediately stop using
the product and distance yourself from it.
● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries.
● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct ame.
This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak,
resulting in electrical shock, re, or injuries. If leaking battery
electrolyte comes into contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing,
immediately ush with water.
20
ç Contents
● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following
precautions.
- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe
away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the
exterior of the power outlet, and the surrounding area.
- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands.
- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the
rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories.
Do not use if the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the
outlet.
- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to
contact the terminals or plug.
- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power
cord, if your product uses one.
This could result in electrical shock or re.
● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited.
The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere
with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices.
Exercise adequate caution when using the product in places
where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside
airplanes and medical facilities.
● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for
extended periods.
Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause low-
temperature burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering.
Use a tripod in hot places, or if you have poor circulation or
insensitive skin.
21
ç Contents
Caution
Denotes the possibility of injury.
● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang
it, subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on
other objects.
● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens.
This could lead to injury or damage the camera.
● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts.
If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments.
● When using the ash, be careful not to cover it with your
ngers or clothing.
This could result in burns or damage to the ash.
● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places:
- Places subject to direct sunlight
- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F)
- Humid or dusty places
These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the
battery pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, re, burns, or
other injuries.
Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, re,
burns, or other injuries.
● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when
viewed for prolonged periods.
● When using optional lenses, lens lters, or lter adapters (if
applicable), be sure to attach these accessories rmly.
If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack,
and the shards of glass may lead to cuts.
22
ç Contents
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, make
sure to avoid pinching your ngers with the lowering ash.
This could result in injury.
Caution
Denotes the possibility of property damage.
● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the
sun on a clear day or an intense articial light source.
Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal
components.
● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy
location, be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the
camera.
● On products that raise and lower the ash automatically, do not
push the ash down or pry it open.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the ash
with a cotton swab or cloth.
The heat emitted from the ash may cause foreign matter to
smoke or the product to malfunction.
● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not
using the product.
Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage.
● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the
terminals with tape or other insulators.
Contacting other metal materials may lead to re or explosions.
23
ç Contents
● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in
use. Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use.
Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it
to overheat and distort, resulting in re.
● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets.
Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or
explosion, resulting in product damage or re.
● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that
have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and
new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the +
and – terminals reversed.
This may cause the product to malfunction.
● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects
do not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen
(so that it faces the body), if your product’s screen closes.
● Do not attach any hard objects to the product.
Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen.
24
ç Contents
Basic Operations
Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations
to shooting and playback
Basic Guide
25
ç Contents
Initial Preparations
Prepare for shooting as follows.
Attaching Accessories
1
Attach the strap.
● Thread the end of the strap
through the strap hole (1), and
then pull the other end of the
strap through the loop on the
threaded end (2).
2
Attach the lens cap.
● Remove the lens cap from the
lens momentarily, thread the end
of the strap through the strap hole
(1), and then pull the lens cap
through the loop (2).
● Always remove the lens cap
before turning the camera on.
● Keep the lens cap on the lens
when the camera is not in use.
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
26
ç Contents
Holding the Camera
● Place the strap around your wrist.
● When shooting, keep your arms
close to your body and hold the
camera securely to prevent it
from moving. If you have raised
the ash, do not rest your ngers
on it.
Charging the Battery Pack
Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be
sure to charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not
sold with the battery pack charged.
1
Insert the battery pack.
● After aligning the marks on the
battery pack and charger, insert
the battery pack by pushing it in
(1) and down (2).
(
1
)
(
2
)
27
ç Contents
2
Charge the battery pack.
● CB-2LF: Flip out the plug (1) and
plug the charger into a power
outlet (2).
● CB-2LFE: Plug the power cord
into the charger, then plug the
other end into a power outlet.
● The charging lamp turns orange,
and charging begins.
● When charging is nished, the
lamp turns green.
3
Remove the battery pack.
● After unplugging the battery
charger, remove the battery pack
by pushing it in (1) and up (2).
● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not
charge it continuously for more than 24 hours.
● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach
the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in
malfunction or damage to the product.
(
2
)
(
1
)
CB-2LF
CB-2LFE
(
1
)
(
2
)
28
ç Contents
● For details on charging time and the number of shots and
recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see
“Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (
=
240).
● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when
they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately
before) the day of use.
● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power
(50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately).
Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card
formatted in another device), you should format the memory card
with this camera (
=
170).
1
Open the cover.
● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2).
(
1
)
(
2
)
29
ç Contents
2
Insert the battery pack.
● Holding the battery pack with the
terminals (1) facing as shown,
press the battery lock (2) in the
direction of the arrow and insert
the battery pack until the lock
clicks shut.
● If you insert the battery pack
facing the wrong way, it cannot be
locked into the correct position.
Always conrm that the battery
pack is facing the right way and
locks when inserted.
3
Check the card’s write-
protect tab and insert the
memory card.
● Recording is not possible on
memory cards with a write-protect
tab when the tab is in the locked
position. Slide the tab to the
unlocked position.
● Insert the memory card with the
label (1) facing as shown until it
clicks into place.
● Make sure the memory card
is facing the right way when
you insert it. Inserting memory
cards facing the wrong way may
damage the camera.
(
1
)
(
2
)
(1)
30
ç Contents
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover (1) and hold it
down as you slide it, until it clicks
into the closed position (2).
● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be
saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory
Card” (
=
241).
Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card
Remove the battery pack.
● Open the cover and press the
battery lock in the direction of the
arrow.
● The battery pack will pop up.
Remove the memory card.
● Push the memory card in until it
clicks, and then slowly release it.
● The memory card will pop up.
(
1
)
(
2
)
31
ç Contents
Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time]
screen is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you
specify this way is recorded in image properties when you shoot,
and it is used when you manage images by shooting date or print
images showing the date.
You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (
=
69).
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The [Date/Time] screen is
displayed.
2
Set the date and time.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
specify the date and time.
● When nished, press the [
]
button.
32
ç Contents
3
Specify your home time zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose your home time zone.
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button when
nished. After a conrmation
message, the setting screen is no
longer displayed.
● To turn off the camera, press the
power button.
● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/
Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on.
Specify the correct information.
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2
and then choose [
] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
Changing the Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
33
ç Contents
2
Choose [Date/Time].
● Move the zoom lever to choose
the [ ] tab.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Change the date and time.
● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date
and Time” (
=
31) to adjust the
settings.
● Press the [
] button to
close the menu screen.
● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the
camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the
battery pack is removed.
● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you
insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC
adapter kit (sold separately,
=
179), even if the camera is left
off.
● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will
be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date
and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (
=
31).
34
ç Contents
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Access the setting screen.
● Press and hold the [ ] button,
and then immediately press the
[ ] button.
3
Set the display language.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to choose a language, and then
press the [ ] button.
● Once the display language has
been set, the setting screen is no
longer displayed.
35
ç Contents
● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after
pressing the [
] button before you press the [ ] button.
In this case, press the [
] button to dismiss the time display and
repeat step 2.
● You can also change the display language by pressing the
[
] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab.
36
ç Contents
Trying the Camera Out
Still Images
Movies
Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images
or movies, and then view them.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic scenes,
simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions.
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Press the [ ] button several
times until [ ] is displayed.
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking
noise as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene
and image stabilization mode are
displayed in the upper right of the
screen.
● Frames displayed around any
detected subjects indicate that
they are in focus.
37
ç Contents
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the
subject, move the zoom lever
toward [ ] (telephoto), and to
zoom away from the subject,
move it toward [ ] (wide angle).
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button lightly,
halfway down. The camera beeps
twice after focusing, and AF
frames are displayed to indicate
image areas in focus.
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed,
lift the ash with your nger to
prepare it for use. If you prefer not
to use the ash, push it down with
your nger, into the camera.
38
ç Contents
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the
way down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter
sound is played, and in low-light
conditions when you have raised
the ash, it res automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the
shutter sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the
camera will revert to the shooting
screen.
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
● Press the movie button. The
camera beeps once as recording
begins, and [ Rec] is displayed
with the elapsed time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the
top and bottom edges of the
screen, and the subject is slightly
enlarged. The black bars indicate
image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any
detected faces indicate that they
are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your
nger off the movie button.
(
1
)
39
ç Contents
2) Finish shooting.
● Press the movie button again to
stop shooting. The camera beeps
twice as recording stops.
Viewing
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen
as follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Browse through your images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button.
40
ç Contents
● To access this screen (Scroll
Display mode), press and hold
the [ ][ ] buttons for at least one
second. In this mode, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to browse through
images.
● To return to single-image display,
press the [
] button.
● Movies are identied by a [
]
icon. To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button again.
● Playback now begins, and after
the movie is nished, [
] is
displayed.
● To adjust the volume, press the
[
][ ] buttons.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
41
ç Contents
Erasing Images
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be
careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel],
and then press the [ ] button.
● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (
=
143).
42
ç Contents
Advanced Guide
Camera Basics
Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your
camera, including shooting and playback options
1
43
ç Contents
On/Off
Shooting Mode
● Press the power button to turn
the camera on and prepare for
shooting.
● To turn the camera off, press the
power button again.
Playback Mode
● Press the [ ] button to turn the
camera on and view your shots.
● To turn the camera off, press the
[
] button again.
● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ]
button.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
45).
● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera
is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is
retracted by pressing the [
] button.
44
ç Contents
Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)
As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically
deactivates the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a
specic period of inactivity.
Power Saving in Shooting Mode
The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute
of inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and
the camera turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for
shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the
shutter button halfway (
=
45).
Power Saving in Playback Mode
The camera turns itself off automatically after about ve minutes
of inactivity.
● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of
Display Off, if you prefer (
=
168).
● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to a
computer (
=
188).
45
ç Contents
Shutter Button
To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the
shutter button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus,
press the button all the way down to shoot.
In this manual, shutter button operations are described as
pressing the button halfway or all the way down.
1
Press halfway. (Press lightly
to focus.)
● Press the shutter button halfway.
The camera beeps twice, and
AF frames are displayed around
image areas in focus.
2
Press all the way down.
(From the halfway position,
press fully to shoot.)
● The camera shoots, as a shutter
sound is played.
● Keep the camera still until the
shutter sound ends.
● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing
the shutter button halfway.
● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time
required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes,
and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject
moves) before the shutter sound ends.
46
ç Contents
Shooting Display Options
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen,
or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed,
see “On-Screen Information” (
=
221).
Information is displayed
No information is displayed
●
Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view function
when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how
shots are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not
match the brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image
distortion or jerky subject motion will not affect recorded images.
● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (
=
127).
47
ç Contents
Using the FUNC. Menu
Congure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as
follows.
Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting
mode (
=
227) or playback mode (
=
237).
1
Access the FUNC. menu.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose a menu item (1), and then
press the [ ] or [ ] button.
● Available options (2) are listed
next to menu items, on the right.
● Depending on the menu item,
functions can be specied simply
by pressing the [
] or [ ] button,
or another screen is displayed for
conguring the function.
(
1
)
(
2
)
48
ç Contents
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
● Options labeled with a [
] icon
can be congured by pressing the
[ ] button.
● To return to the menu items,
press the [
] button.
4
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button.
● The screen before you pressed
the [
] button in step 1 is
displayed again, showing the
option you congured.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
175).
49
ç Contents
Using the Menu Screen
Congure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen
as follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as
shooting [ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu
items vary depending on the selected shooting or playback mode
(
=
230 –
=
237).
1
Access the menu screen.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a tab.
● Move the zoom lever to choose
a tab.
● After you have pressed the
[
][ ] buttons to choose a tab
initially, you can switch between
tabs by pressing the [ ][ ]
buttons.
50
ç Contents
3
Choose a menu item.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose a menu item.
● For menu items with options
not shown, rst press the [
] or
[ ] button to switch screens, and
then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
select the menu item.
● To return to the previous screen,
press the [
] button.
4
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
5
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button to
return to the screen displayed
before you pressed the [ ]
button in step 1.
● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the
camera’s default settings (
=
175).
51
ç Contents
Indicator Display
The indicator on the back of the camera (
=
4) lights up or
blinks depending on the camera status.
Color
Indicator
Status
Camera Status
Green
On
Connected to a computer (
=
188), or
display off (
=
44,
=
167,
=
168)
Blinking
Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting
images, or shooting long exposures (
=
95)
● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open
the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which
may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card.
52
ç Contents
Clock
You can check the current time.
● Press and hold the [
] button.
● The current time appears.
● If you hold the camera vertically
while using the clock function,
it will switch to vertical display.
Press the [
][ ] buttons to
change the display color.
● Press the [
] button again to
cancel the clock display.
● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ ] button, then
press the power button to display the clock.
53
ç Contents
2
Auto Mode
Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over
shooting
54
ç Contents
Shooting with Camera-
Determined Settings
For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specic
scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting
conditions.
Shooting (Smart Auto)
Still Images
Movies
1
Turn the camera on.
● Press the power button.
● The startup screen is displayed.
2
Enter [ ] mode.
● Press the [ ] button several
times until [ ] is displayed.
● Aim the camera at the subject. The
camera will make a slight clicking
noise as it determines the scene.
● Icons representing the scene
and image stabilization mode are
displayed in the upper right of the
screen (
=
60,
=
62).
● Frames displayed around any
detected subjects indicate that
they are in focus.
55
ç Contents
3
Compose the shot.
● To zoom in and enlarge the
subject, move the zoom lever
toward [ ] (telephoto), and to
zoom away from the subject,
move it toward [ ] (wide angle).
(A zoom bar (1) showing the
zoom position is displayed.)
● To zoom in or out quickly, move the
zoom lever all the way toward [ ]
(telephoto) or [ ] (wide angle),
and to zoom in or out slowly, move
it just a little in the desired direction.
4
Shoot.
Shooting Still Images
1) Focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
The camera beeps twice after
focusing, and AF frames are
displayed to indicate image areas
in focus.
● Several AF frames are displayed
when multiple areas are in focus.
(
1
)
56
ç Contents
● If [Raise the ash] is displayed,
lift the ash with your nger to
prepare it for use. If you prefer not
to use the ash, push it down with
your nger, into the camera.
2) Shoot.
● Press the shutter button all the
way down.
● As the camera shoots, a shutter
sound is played, and in low-light
conditions when you have raised
the ash, it res automatically.
● Keep the camera still until the
shutter sound ends.
● After displaying your shot, the
camera will revert to the shooting
screen.
57
ç Contents
Shooting Movies
1) Start shooting.
● Press the movie button. The
camera beeps once as recording
begins, and [ Rec] is displayed
with the elapsed time (1).
● Black bars are displayed on the
top and bottom edges of the
screen, and the subject is slightly
enlarged. The black bars indicate
image areas not recorded.
● Frames displayed around any
detected faces indicate that they
are in focus.
● Once recording begins, take your
nger off the movie button.
2)
Resize the subject and
recompose the shot as needed.
● To resize the subject, repeat the
operations in step 3.
However, note that the sound
of camera operations will be
recorded. Note that movies shot
at zoom factors shown in blue will
look grainy.
● When you recompose shots, the
focus, brightness, and colors will
be automatically adjusted.
(
1
)
58
ç Contents
3) Finish shooting.
● Press the movie button again to
stop shooting. The camera beeps
twice as recording stops.
● Recording will stop automatically
when the memory card becomes full.
Still Images/Movies
● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down,
the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press
the [
] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then
press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [Off].
Still Images
● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be
blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a
tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
● If your shots are dark despite the ash ring, move closer to the
subject. For details on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
242).
● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once
when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the
focusing range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (
=
243).
● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be
activated when shooting in low-light conditions.
● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that
shooting is not possible until the ash has nished recharging. Shooting
can resume as soon as the ash is ready, so either press the shutter
button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it again.
● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed,
your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness, and colors used.
59
ç Contents
● You can change how long images are displayed after shots
(
=
81).
Movies
● Before shooting a movie, lower the ash with your nger. Be
careful not to touch the microphone (1) when shooting a movie.
Leaving the ash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent
audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound
mufed.
● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when
shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be
recorded.
● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes
and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of signicant
camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before
shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (
=
121).
(
1
)
● Audio recording is monaural.
60
ç Contents
Scene Icons
Still Images
Movies
In [ ] mode, shooting scenes determined by the camera are
indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are
automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness,
and color.
Background
When Shooting People
Icon
Background
Color
People
In
Motion*
1
Shadows
on Face*
1
Bright
Gray
Bright and
Backlit
–
With Blue Sky
Light Blue
Blue Sky and
Backlit
–
Spotlights
Dark Blue
Dark
Dark, Using
Tripod
*
2
– –
61
ç Contents
Background
When Shooting Other Subjects
Icon
Background
Color
Other
Subjects
In
Motion*
1
At Close
Range
Bright
Gray
Bright and
Backlit
With Blue Sky
Light Blue
Blue Sky and
Backlit
Sunsets
–
Orange
Spotlights
Dark Blue
Dark
Dark, Using
Tripod
*
2
– –
*1 Not displayed for movies.
*2 Displayed in dark scenes when the camera is held still, as when
mounted on a tripod.
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
97) if the scene icon does not
match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot
with your expected effect, color, or brightness.
62
ç Contents
Image Stabilization Icons
Still Images
Movies
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is
automatically applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following
icons are displayed in [ ] mode.
Image stabilization for still images (Normal)
Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)*
Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie
recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization for
macro movie recording is used (Hybrid IS).
Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera
shake, as when shooting while walking (Dynamic)
Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when
shooting movies at telephoto (Powered)
No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted
on a tripod or held still by other means. However, during
movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization
to counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used
(Tripod IS).
* Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera.
When you follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only
counteracts vertical camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops.
Similarly, when you follow subjects moving vertically, image stabilization
only counteracts horizontal camera shake.
● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (
=
121). In
this case, an IS icon is not displayed.
63
ç Contents
On-Screen Frames
Still Images
Movies
A variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects
subjects you are aiming the camera at.
● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s
face) determined by the camera to be the main subject, and
gray frames are displayed around other detected faces.
Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to
keep them in focus. However, if the camera detects subject
movement, only the white frame will remain on the screen.
● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the
camera detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed,
and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted
(Servo AF).
● Try shooting in [ ] mode (
=
97) if no frames are displayed, if
frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are
displayed on the background or similar areas.
64
ç Contents
Common, Convenient Features
Still Images
Movies
Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)
When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical
zoom, use digital zoom for up to about 160x enlargement.
1
Move the zoom lever toward
[ ].
● Hold the lever until zooming
stops.
● Zooming stops at the largest
possible zoom factor (before
the image becomes noticeably
grainy), which is then indicated on
the screen.
2
Move the zoom lever toward
[ ] again.
● The camera zooms in even closer
on the subject.
● (1) is the current zoom factor.
(
1
)
65
ç Contents
● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates
the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change
depending on the zoom range.
- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not
appear grainy.
- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not
noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus).
- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy.
● Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution
settings (
=
73), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by
following step 1.
● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (
=
49) ► [ ] tab
► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off].
66
ç Contents
Using the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or
other timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after
you press the shutter button.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ],
and then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
2
Shoot.
● For Still Images: Press the shutter
button halfway to focus on the
subject, and then press it all the
way down.
● For Movies: Press the movie
button.
67
ç Contents
● Once you start the self-timer, the
lamp will blink and the camera will
play a self-timer sound.
● Two seconds before the shot, the
blinking and sound will speed up.
(The lamp will remain lit in case
the ash res.)
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● To restore the original setting,
choose [
] in step 1.
Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake
Still Images
Movies
This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after
you have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady
while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot.
● Follow step 1 in “Using the Self-
Timer” (
=
66) and choose [ ].
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-
Timer” (
=
66) to shoot.
68
ç Contents
Customizing the Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots
(1 – 10).
1
Choose [ ].
● Following step 1 in “Using the
Self-Timer” (
=
66), choose [ ]
and press the [ ] button
immediately.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Delay] or [Shots].
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose a value, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
● Follow step 2 in “Using the Self-
Timer” (
=
66) to shoot.
● For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay
before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect.
69
ç Contents
● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white
balance are determined by the rst shot. More time is required
between shots when the ash res or when you have specied
to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the
memory card becomes full.
● When a delay longer than two seconds is specied, two seconds
before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed
up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the ash res.)
Adding a Date Stamp
Still Images
Movies
The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lower-
right corner.
However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so
conrm beforehand that the date and time are correct (
=
31).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button,
choose [Date Stamp ] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose the
desired option (
=
49).
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
70
ç Contents
2
Shoot.
● As you take shots, the camera
adds the shooting date or time to
the lower-right corner of images.
● To restore the original setting,
choose [Off] in step 1.
● Date stamps cannot be edited or removed.
● Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one
as follows.
However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already
have one may cause it to be printed twice.
- Print using printer functions (
=
191)
- Use camera DPOF print settings (
=
200) to print
71
ç Contents
Continuous Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously.
For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous
Shooting Speed” (
=
243).
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ]
in the menu, and then choose
[ ] (
=
47).
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
2
Shoot.
● Hold the shutter button all the way
down to shoot continuously.
● During continuous shooting, focus and exposure are locked at the
position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway.
● Cannot be used with the self-timer (
=
66).
● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow
down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the
zoom position.
● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down.
● Shooting may slow down if the ash res.
72
ç Contents
Image Customization Features
Changing the Aspect Ratio
Still Images
Movies
Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● Once the setting is complete,
the screen aspect ratio will be
updated.
● To restore the original setting,
repeat this process but choose
[
].
Same aspect ratio as widescreen HDTVs.
Same aspect ratio as 35mm lm, used for printing images
at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes.
Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display
on standard-denition televisions or similar display devices, or
for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes.
Square aspect ratio.
73
ç Contents
Changing Image Resolution (Size)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For
guidelines on how many shots at each resolution setting can t
on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card”
(
=
241).
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting,
repeat this process but choose
[
].
Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on
Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)
A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.)
A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.)
3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard
For e-mailing and similar purposes
74
ç Contents
Changing Movie Image Quality
Still Images
Movies
2 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the
maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will
t on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card”
(
=
242).
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● To restore the original setting,
repeat this process but choose
[
].
Image
Quality
Resolution Frame Rate Details
1280 x 720 25 fps For shooting in HD
640 x 480 30 fps
For shooting in
standard denition
● In [ ] mode, black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges
of the screen indicate image areas not recorded.
75
ç Contents
Helpful Shooting Features
Displaying Grid Lines
Still Images
Movies
Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and
horizontal reference while shooting.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [Grid Lines] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
49).
● Once the setting is complete, grid
lines are displayed on the screen.
● To restore the original setting,
repeat this process but choose
[Off].
● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots.
76
ç Contents
Magnifying the Area in Focus
Still Images
Movies
You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway,
which will enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF
frame.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button,
choose [AF-Point Zoom] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
49).
2
Check the focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
The face detected as the main
subject is now magnied.
● To restore the original setting,
choose [Off] in step 1.
77
ç Contents
● The area in focus is not magnied in the following cases when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.
- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the
camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the
camera detects subject movement
- When digital zoom is used (
=
64)
- When Tracking AF is used (
=
112)
- When a TV is used as a display (
=
182)
Checking for Closed Eyes
Still Images
Movies
[ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have
closed their eyes.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button,
choose [Blink Detection] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose [On]
(
=
49).
78
ç Contents
2
Shoot.
● [ ] ashes when the camera
detects a person whose eyes are
closed.
● To restore the original setting,
choose [Off] in step 1.
● When you have specied multiple shots in [ ] mode, this
function is only available for the nal shot.
● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when
you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display
Time] (
=
81).
● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode (
=
71).
79
ç Contents
Customizing Camera Operation
Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen
as follows.
For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen”
(
=
49).
Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you
focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light
conditions.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [AF-assist Beam] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose [Off]
(
=
49).
● To restore the original setting,
repeat this process but choose
[On].
80
ç Contents
Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp
Still Images
Movies
You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to
reduce red-eye when the ash is used in low-light shots.
1
Access the [Flash Settings]
screen.
● Press the [ ] button,
choose [Flash Settings] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ]
button (
=
49).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Off] for [Red-Eye Lamp]
(
=
49).
● To restore the original setting,
repeat this process but choose
[On].
81
ç Contents
Changing the Image Display Style after Shots
Still Images
Movies
You can change how long images are displayed and what
information is displayed immediately after shooting.
Changing the Image Display Period after Shots
1
Access the [Review image
after shooting] screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Review image after shooting] on
the [ ] tab, and then press the
[ ] button (
=
49).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Display Time]. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
desired option.
● To restore the original setting, repeat
this process but choose [Quick].
Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again.
2 sec.,
4 sec., 8 sec.
Displays images for the specied time. Even
while the shot is displayed, you can take another
shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again.
Hold
Displays images until you press the shutter button
halfway.
Off No image display after shots.
82
ç Contents
Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots
Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows.
1
Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.],
[4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold]
(=
81).
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Display Info]. Press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose the
desired option.
● To restore the original setting,
repeat this process but choose
[Off].
Off Displays only the image.
Detailed
Displays shooting details (
=
223).
● When [Display Time] (
=
81) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display
Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed.
● By pressing the [
] button while an image is displayed after
shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the
settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase
images by pressing the [
] button, or protect (
=
137) or tag
images as favorites (
=
150) by pressing the [ ] button.
83
ç Contents
3
Other Shooting Modes
Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots
enhanced with unique image effects or captured using
special functions
84
ç Contents
Brightness / Color Customization
(Live View Control)
Still Images
Movies
Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily
customized as follows.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Press the [ ] button several
times until [ ] is displayed.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button to
access the setting screen. Press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
setting item, and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to adjust the value
as you watch the screen.
● Press the [
] button.
3
Shoot.
Brightness
For brighter images, adjust the level to the right,
and for darker images, adjust it to the left.
Color
For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right,
and for more subdued images, adjust it to the left.
Tone
For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the
right, and for a cool, bluish tone, adjust it to the left.
85
ç Contents
Specic Scenes
Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will
automatically congure the settings for optimal shots.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
● Press the [ ] button several
times until [ ] is displayed.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose
the desired option (
=
47).
2
Shoot.
Shooting Portraits (Portrait)
Still Images
Movies
● Take shots of people with a
softening effect.
Shooting under Low Light
(Low Light)
Still Images
Movies
● Shoot with minimal camera and
subject shake even in low-light
conditions.
86
ç Contents
Shooting with Snowy
Backgrounds (Snow)
Still Images
Movies
● Bright, natural-colored shots
of people against snowy
backgrounds.
Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks)
Still Images
Movies
● Vivid shots of reworks.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
121).
● [ ] mode resolution is [ ] (2304 x 1728) and cannot be changed.
● In [
] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press
the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined.
87
ç Contents
Applying Special Effects
Add a variety of effects to images when shooting.
1
Choose a shooting mode.
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) to choose a shooting
mode.
2
Shoot.
Shooting in Vivid Colors
(Super Vivid)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots in rich, vivid colors.
Posterized Shots (Poster Effect)
Still Images
Movies
● Shots that resemble an old poster
or illustration.
● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots rst, to make
sure you obtain the desired results.
88
ç Contents
Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect
(Fish-Eye Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot with the distorting effect of a sh-eye lens.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) and choose [ ].
2
Choose an effect level.
● Press the [ ] button, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
effect level, and then press the
[ ] button again.
● A preview is shown of how your
shot will look with the effect
applied.
3
Shoot.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
89
ç Contents
Shots Resembling Miniature Models
(Miniature Effect)
Still Images
Movies
Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas
above and below your selected area.
You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature
models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is
recorded. People and objects in the scene will move quickly during
playback. Note that sound is not recorded.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) and choose [ ].
● A white frame is displayed,
indicating the image area that will
not be blurred.
2
Choose the area to keep in focus.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Move the zoom lever to resize
the frame, and press the [
][ ]
buttons to move it.
3
For movies, choose the
movie playback speed.
● Press the [ ] button, and
then press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the speed.
90
ç Contents
4
Return to the shooting
screen and shoot.
● Press the [ ] button to
return to the shooting screen, and
then shoot.
Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time
(for One-Minute Clips)
Speed Playback Time
Approx. 12 sec.
Approx. 6 sec.
Approx. 3 sec.
● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set
the zoom before shooting.
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
● To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical
or vice-versa), press the [
] button in step 2. You can move the
frame in vertical orientation by pressing the [
][ ] buttons.
● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the
frame.
● Movie image quality is [
] at an aspect ratio of [ ] and [ ] at
an aspect ratio of [
] (
=
72). These quality settings cannot
be changed.
91
ç Contents
Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect
(Toy Camera Effect)
Still Images
Movies
This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by
vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall
color.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
color tone, and then press the
[ ] button again.
● A preview is shown of how your
shot will look with the effect applied.
3
Shoot.
Standard Shots resemble toy camera images.
Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard].
Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard].
● Try taking some test shots rst, to make sure you obtain the
desired results.
92
ç Contents
Shooting in Monochrome
Still Images
Movies
Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) and choose [ ].
2
Choose a color tone.
● Press the [ ] button, press
the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a
color tone, and then press the
[ ] button again.
● A preview is shown of how your
shot will look with the effect
applied.
3
Shoot.
B/W Black and white shots.
Sepia Sepia tone shots.
Blue Blue and white shots.
93
ç Contents
Special Modes for Other Purposes
Using the Face Self-Timer
Still Images
Movies
The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the
face of another person (such as the photographer) has entered
the shooting area (
=
111). This is useful when including yourself
in group photos or similar shots.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) and choose [ ].
2
Compose the shot and press
the shutter button halfway.
● Make sure a green frame is
displayed around the face you
focus on and white frames around
other faces.
3
Press the shutter button all
the way down.
● The camera now enters shooting
standby mode, and [Look straight
at camera to start count down] is
displayed.
● The lamp blinks and the self-timer
sound is played.
94
ç Contents
4
Join the subjects in the shooting
area and look at the camera.
● After the camera detects a new
face, the lamp blinking and
self-timer sound will speed up.
(When the ash res, the lamp
will remain lit.) About two seconds
later, the camera will shoot.
● To cancel shooting after you have
triggered the self-timer, press the
[
] button.
● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the
shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later.
● To change the number of shots, after choosing [
] in step 1,
press the [
] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the
number of shots, and then press the [
] button again. [Blink
Detection] (
=
77) is only available for the nal shot.
95
ç Contents
Shooting Long Exposures (Long Shutter)
Still Images
Movies
Specify a shutter speed of 1 – 15 seconds to shoot long
exposures. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take
other measures to prevent camera shake.
1
Choose [ ].
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) and choose [ ].
2
Choose the shutter speed.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose the
shutter speed, and then press the
[ ] button.
3
Check the exposure.
● Press the shutter button halfway
to view the exposure for your
selected shutter speed.
4
Shoot.
96
ç Contents
● On-screen image brightness in step 3, when you pressed the
shutter button halfway, may not match the brightness of your
shots.
● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a
delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes
images to reduce noise.
● Set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to
secure the camera (
=
121).
● If the ash res, your shot may be overexposed. In this case, set
the ash to [
] and shoot again (
=
117).
97
ç Contents
4
P Mode
More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style
● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera when
set to [
] mode.
● [
]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure
● Before using a function introduced in this chapter
in modes other than [
], make sure the function is
available in that mode (
=
225).
98
ç Contents
Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode)
Still Images
Movies
You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred
shooting style.
1
Enter [ ] mode.
● Follow step 1 in “Specic Scenes”
(
=
85) and choose [ ].
2
Customize the settings as
desired (=
99 – =
121),
and then shoot.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the
shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are
displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed
(
=
102) or activating the ash (if subjects are dark,
=
117),
which may enable adequate exposure.
● Movies can be recorded in [
] mode as well, by pressing the
movie button. However, some FUNC. (
=
47) and MENU
(
=
49) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie
recording.
99
ç Contents
Image Brightness (Exposure)
Adjusting Image Brightness
(Exposure Compensation)
Still Images
Movies
The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3-
stop increments, in a range of –2 to +2.
● Press the [
] button. As you
watch the screen, press the [ ][ ]
buttons to adjust brightness.
● When shooting movies, shoot
with the exposure compensation
bar displayed.
● When shooting still images, press
the [
] button to display the set
exposure compensation amount,
and then shoot.
● You can also shoot still images with exposure compensation bar
displayed.
● While recording a movie, [
] is displayed, and the exposure is
locked.
100
ç Contents
Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify
focus and exposure separately.
1
Lock the exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to
shoot with the exposure locked.
With the shutter button pressed
halfway, press the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed, and the
exposure is locked.
● To unlock AE, release the shutter
button and press the [
] button
again. In this case, [ ] is no
longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
● AE: Auto Exposure
101
ç Contents
Changing the Metering Method
Still Images
Movies
Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit
shooting conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button, choose [ ]
in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Evaluative
For typical shooting conditions, including
backlit shots. Automatically adjusts exposure
to match the shooting conditions.
Center
Weighted
Avg.
Determines the average brightness of light
across the entire image area, calculated by
treating brightness in the central area as more
important.
Spot
Metering restricted to within the [
] (Spot
AE Point frame), displayed in the center of the
screen.
102
ç Contents
Changing the ISO Speed
Still Images
Movies
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
AUTO
Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the
shooting mode and conditions.
100, 200 Low
For shooting outdoors in fair
weather.
400, 800 Slightly Low
For shooting in cloudy
conditions, or at twilight.
1600 Slightly High
For shooting night scenes, or
in dark rooms.
● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have
set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway.
● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image
graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera
shake in some shooting conditions.
● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which
may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the ash
range. However, shots may look grainy.
103
ç Contents
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as
faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted
to the optimal brightness. Insufcient overall image contrast can
also be automatically corrected before shooting to make subjects
stand out better.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [i-Contrast] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose [Auto]
(
=
49).
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or
may cause images to appear grainy.
● You can also correct existing images (
=
157).
104
ç Contents
Image Colors
Adjusting White Balance
Still Images
Movies
By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look
more natural for the scene you are shooting.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
Auto
Automatically sets the optimal white balance
for the shooting conditions.
Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather.
Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight.
Tungsten
For shooting under ordinary incandescent
lighting.
Fluorescent For shooting under white uorescent lighting.
Fluorescent H
For shooting under daylight uorescent lighting.
Custom
For manually setting a custom white balance
(
=
105).
105
ç Contents
Custom White Balance
Still Images
Movies
For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust
white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the
white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot.
● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White
Balance” (
=
104) to choose [ ].
● Aim the camera at a plain white
subject, so that the entire screen
is white. Press the [ ] button.
● The tint of the screen changes
once the white balance data has
been recorded.
● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after
recording white balance data.
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images
to sepia or black and white.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
106
ç Contents
My Colors Off
–
Vivid
Emphasizes contrast and color
saturation, making images sharper.
Neutral
Tones down contrast and color
saturation for subdued images.
Sepia Creates sepia tone images.
B/W Creates black and white images.
Positive Film
Combines the effects of Vivid Blue,
Vivid Green, and Vivid Red to produce
intense yet natural-looking colors
resembling images on positive lm.
Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones.
Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones.
Vivid Blue
Emphasizes blues in images. Makes
the sky, ocean, and other blue subjects
more vivid.
Vivid Green
Emphasizes greens in images. Makes
mountains, foliage, and other green
subjects more vivid.
Vivid Red
Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red
subjects more vivid.
Custom Color
Adjust contrast, sharpness, color
saturation, and other qualities as
desired (
=
107).
107
ç Contents
● White balance (
=
104) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes.
● With [
] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone
may change. These settings may not produce the expected
results with some skin tones.
Custom Color
Still Images
Movies
Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color
saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Follow the steps in “Changing
Image Color Tones (My Colors)”
(
=
105) to choose [ ], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option, and then
specify the value by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons.
● For stronger/more intense effects
(or darker skin tones), adjust the
value to the right, and for weaker/
lighter effects (or lighter skin
tones), adjust the value to the left.
● Press the [
] button to
complete the setting.
108
ç Contents
Shooting Range and Focusing
Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera
to [ ]. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range”
(
=
243).
● Press the [
] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
● If the ash res, vignetting may occur.
● Be careful to avoid damaging the lens.
● In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [
] will turn
gray and the camera will not focus.
● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod
and shooting with the camera set to [
] (
=
67).
109
ç Contents
Shooting Distant Subjects (Innity)
Still Images
Movies
To restrict the focus to distant subjects, set the camera to [ ]. For
details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (
=
243).
● Press the [
] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and
then press the [ ] button.
● Once the setting is complete, [
]
is displayed.
Digital Tele-Converter
Still Images
Movies
The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately
1.6x or 2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter
speed is faster than it would be if you zoomed (including using
digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [Digital Zoom] on the [ ]
tab, and then choose the desired
option (
=
49).
● The view is enlarged and the
zoom factor is displayed on the
screen.
110
ç Contents
● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom
(
=
64) or AF-point zoom (
=
76).
● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom
lever all the way toward [
] for maximum telephoto, and when
you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step
2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (
=
64).
Changing the AF Frame Mode
Still Images
Movies
Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting
conditions as follows.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [AF Frame] on the [ ]
tab, and then choose the desired
option (
=
49).
Center
Still Images
Movies
One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing.
● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot
focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
111
ç Contents
● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set
[AF Frame Size] on the [
] tab to [Small] (
=
49).
● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital
zoom (
=
64) or digital tele-converter (
=
109).
● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or
in a corner, rst aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF
frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you
continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot
as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down
(Focus Lock).
● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter
button halfway and [AF-Point Zoom] (
=
76) is set to [On].
Face AiAF
Still Images
Movies
● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure
(evaluative metering only), and white balance ([ ] only).
● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame
is displayed around the person’s face determined by the
camera to be the main subject, and up to two gray frames are
displayed around other detected faces.
● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving
subjects, within a certain range.
● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green
frames are displayed around faces in focus.
112
ç Contents
● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed
(without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in
the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway.
● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (
=
114) is set to [On],
the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you
press the shutter button halfway.
● Examples of faces that cannot be detected:
- Subjects that are distant or extremely close
- Subjects that are dark or light
- Faces in prole, at an angle, or partly hidden
● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces.
● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you
press the shutter button halfway.
Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF)
Still Images
Movies
Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows.
1
Choose [Tracking AF].
● Follow the steps in “Changing
the AF Frame Mode” (
=
110) to
choose [Tracking AF].
● [ ] is displayed in the center of the
screen.
113
ç Contents
2
Choose a subject to focus on.
● Aim the camera so that [ ] is
on the desired subject, and then
press the [ ] button.
● When the subject is detected,
the camera beeps and [
] is
displayed. Even if the subject
moves, the camera will continue
to track the subject within a
certain range.
● If no subject is detected, [
] is
displayed.
● To cancel tracking, press the [
]
button again.
3
Shoot.
● Press the shutter button halfway.
[ ] changes to a blue [ ], which
follows the subject as the camera
continues to adjust the focus and
exposure (Servo AF) (
=
114).
● Press the shutter button all the
way down to shoot.
● Even after your shot, [
] is
still displayed and the camera
continues to track the subject.
114
ç Contents
● [Servo AF] (
=
114) is set to [On] and cannot be changed.
● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or
move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches
that of the background too closely.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
49) is not available.
● [
] and [ ] are not available.
● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter
button halfway without pressing the [
] button. After your shot,
[
] is displayed in the center of the screen.
Shooting with Servo AF
Still Images
Movies
This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion,
because the camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust
the exposure as long as you press the shutter button halfway.
1
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Servo AF] on the [ ] tab, and
then choose [On] (
=
49).
2
Focus.
● The focus and exposure are
maintained where the blue AF
frame is displayed while you
are pressing the shutter button
halfway.
115
ç Contents
● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions.
● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames
may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway.
In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the
specied AF frame mode.
● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and
aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter
button, and then press it halfway again.
● AF lock shooting is not available.
● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [
] tab (
=
49) is not available.
● Not available when using the self-timer (
=
66).
Changing the Focus Setting
Still Images
Movies
You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing
on subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not
pressed. Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment
you press the shutter button halfway.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [Continuous AF] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose [Off]
(
=
49).
116
ç Contents
On
Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities,
because the camera constantly focuses on subjects until
you press the shutter button halfway.
Off
Conserves battery power, because the camera does not
focus constantly.
Shooting with the AF Lock
Still Images
Movies
The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal
position will not change even when you release your nger from
the shutter button.
1
Lock the focus.
● With the shutter button pressed
halfway, press the [ ] button.
● The focus is now locked, and [
]
is displayed.
● To unlock the focus, release the
shutter button and press the [
]
button again. In this case, [ ] is
no longer displayed.
2
Compose the shot and shoot.
117
ç Contents
Flash
Changing the Flash Mode
Still Images
Movies
You can change the ash mode to match the shooting scene. For
details on the ash range, see “Flash Range” (
=
242).
1
Lift the ash.
2
Congure the setting.
● Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose a ash
mode, and then press the [ ]
button.
● The option you congured is now
displayed.
● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ]
button when the ash is lowered. Lift the ash with your nger in
advance.
Auto
Fires automatically in low-light conditions.
118
ç Contents
On
Fires for each shot.
Slow Synchro
Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while
shooting at a slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out
of ash range.
● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other
measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally,
you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other
means to secure the camera (
=
121).
● In [
] mode, even after the ash res, ensure that the main
subject does not move until the shutter sound is nished playing.
Off
For shooting without the ash.
● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions,
mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
119
ç Contents
Shooting with the FE Lock
Still Images
Movies
Just as with the AE lock (
=
100), you can lock the exposure for the
ash shots.
1
Lift the ash and set the ash
to [ ] (=
117).
2
Lock the ash exposure.
● Aim the camera at the subject to
shoot with the exposure locked.
With the shutter button pressed
halfway, press the [ ] button.
● The ash res, and when [ ] is
displayed, the ash output level is
retained.
● To unlock FE, release the shutter
button and press the [ ] button
again. In this case, [ ] is no
longer displayed.
3
Compose the shot and shoot.
● FE: Flash Exposure
120
ç Contents
Other Settings
Changing the Compression Ratio
(Image Quality)
Still Images
Movies
Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ]
(Fine), as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each
compression ratio can t on a memory card, see “Number of Shots
per Memory Card” (
=
241).
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
121
ç Contents
Changing the IS Mode Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button,
choose [IS Settings] on the [ ]
tab, and then press the [ ] button
(
=
49).
2
Congure the setting.
● Choose [IS Mode], and then
choose the desired option
(
=
49).
Continuous
Optimal image stabilization for the shooting
conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS)
(
=
62).
Shoot Only*
Image stabilization is active only at the moment
of shooting.
Off Deactivates image stabilization.
* The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording.
● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the
camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this
case, set [IS Mode] to [Off].
122
ç Contents
Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same
Size Shown before Shooting
Still Images
Movies
Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area
changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of
signicant camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size
shown before shooting, you can choose not to reduce signicant
camera shake.
● Follow the steps in “Changing
the IS Mode Settings” (
=
121)
to access the [IS Settings] screen.
● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then
choose [2] (
=
49).
● When movie image quality is set to [ ] (
=
74), the [Dynamic
IS] setting is [1] and cannot be changed.
● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded
at the same size shown before shooting.
123
ç Contents
5
Playback Mode
Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in
many ways
● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the
[
] button to enter Playback mode.
● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that
were renamed or already edited on a computer, or
images from other cameras.
124
ç Contents
Viewing
Still Images
Movies
After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen
as follows.
1
Enter Playback mode.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Your last shot is displayed.
2
Browse through your images.
● To view the previous image, press
the [ ] button. To view the next
image, press the [ ] button.
125
ç Contents
● To access this screen (Scroll
Display mode), press and hold
the [ ][ ] buttons for at least one
second. In this mode, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to browse through
images.
● To return to single-image display,
press the [
] button.
● To browse images grouped by
shooting date, press the [
][ ]
buttons in Scroll Display mode.
● Movies are identied by a [
]
icon. To play movies, go to step 3.
3
Play movies.
● To start playback, press the [ ]
button, press the [ ][ ] buttons
to choose [ ], and then press
the [ ] button again.
126
ç Contents
4
Adjust the volume.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
adjust the volume.
● To adjust the volume when the
volume indicator (1) is no longer
displayed, press the [
][ ]
buttons.
5
Pause playback.
● To pause or resume playback,
press the [ ] button.
● After the movie is nished,
[
] is displayed.
● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the
shutter button halfway.
● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (
=
49) ► [ ] tab
► [Scroll Display] ► [Off].
● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback
mode, choose MENU (
=
49) ► [ ] tab ► [Resume] ►
[Last shot].
● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU
(
=
49) and choose your desired effect on the [ ] tab ►
[Transition].
(
1
)
127
ç Contents
Switching Display Modes
Still Images
Movies
Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen,
or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed,
see “Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (
=
223).
No Information Display
Simple Information Display
Detailed Information Display
128
ç Contents
Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)
Still Images
Movies
Washed-out highlights in the image ash on the screen in detailed
information display (
=
127).
Histogram
Still Images
Movies
● The graph in detailed information
display (
=
127) is a histogram
showing the distribution of
brightness in the image. The
horizontal axis represents the
degree of brightness, and the
vertical axis, how much of
the image is at each level of
brightness. Viewing the histogram
is a way to check exposure.
129
ç Contents
Browsing and Filtering Images
Navigating through Images in an Index
Still Images
Movies
By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly nd the
images you are looking for.
1
Display images in an index.
● Move the zoom lever toward
[ ] to display images in an
index. Moving the lever again will
increase the number of images
shown.
● To display fewer images, move
the zoom lever toward [
]. Fewer
images are shown each time you
move the lever.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
● An orange frame is displayed
around the selected image.
● Press the [
] button to view the
selected image in single-image
display.
130
ç Contents
Finding Images Matching Specied Conditions
Still Images
Movies
Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by
ltering image display according to your specied conditions. You can
also protect (
=
137) or delete (
=
142) these images all at once.
People
Displays images with detected faces.
Date
Displays the images shot on a specic date.
Favorites
Displays images tagged as favorites (
=
150).
Still image/Movie
Displays only still images or movies.
1
Choose a search condition.
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose a
condition (
=
47).
● When you have selected [
]
or [ ], choose the condition by
pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
on the screen displayed, and then
press the [ ] button.
2
View the ltered images.
● Images matching your conditions
are displayed in yellow frames. To
view only these images, press the
[ ][ ] buttons.
● To cancel ltered display, choose
[
] in step 1.
131
ç Contents
● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some
conditions, those conditions will not be available.
● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 2.
● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include
“Navigating through Images in an Index” (
=
129), “Magnifying
Images” (
=
132), and “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
133). You can
also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing
[Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (
=
137) or
[Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once”
(
=
143), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
200), or
“Adding Images to a Photobook” (
=
205).
● If you edit images and save them as new images (
=
152 –
=
160), a message is displayed, and the images that were
found are no longer shown.
132
ç Contents
Image Viewing Options
Magnifying Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Magnify an image.
● Moving the zoom lever toward
[ ] will zoom in and magnify the
image, and [ ] is displayed.
You can magnify images up to
about 10x by continuing to hold
the zoom lever.
● The approximate position of the
displayed area (1) is shown for
reference.
● To zoom out, move the zoom
lever toward [
]. You can
return to single-image display by
continuing to hold it.
(
1
)
133
ç Contents
2
Move the display position and
switch images as needed.
● To move the display position,
press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● While [
] is displayed, you
can switch to [ ] by pressing
the [ ] button. To switch to other
images while zoomed, press
the [ ][ ] buttons. Press the
[ ] button again to restore the
original setting.
● You can return to single-image display from magnied display by
pressing the [
] button.
Viewing Slideshows
Still Images
Movies
Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows.
Each image is displayed for about three seconds.
● Press the [
] button, choose
[ ] in the menu, and choose the
desired option (
=
47).
● The slideshow will start after
[Loading image] is displayed for a
few seconds.
● Press the [
] button to stop
the slideshow.
134
ç Contents
● The camera’s power-saving functions (
=
44) are deactivated
during slideshows.
● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button.
● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the
[
][ ] buttons. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the [ ][ ]
buttons down.
● In ltered display (
=
130), only images matching search
conditions are played.
Changing Slideshow Settings
You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the
transitions between images and the display duration of each image.
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [Slideshow] on the
[ ] tab (
=
49).
2
Congure the settings.
● Choose a menu item to congure,
and then choose the desired
option (
=
49).
● To start the slideshow with your
settings, choose [Start] and press
the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen,
press the [
] button.
135
ç Contents
● [Play Time] cannot be modied when [Bubble] is chosen in [Effect].
Auto Playback of Related Images
(Smart Shufe)
Still Images
Movies
Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that
you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those
images, the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable
way to play back images in an unexpected order. Try this feature
after you have taken many shots, in many kinds of scenes.
1
Choose Smart Shufe.
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [ ] in the menu
(
=
47).
● Four candidate images are
displayed.
136
ç Contents
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to choose the image you want to
view next.
● Your chosen image is displayed
in the center, surrounded by the
next four candidate images.
● For full-screen display of the center
image, press the [ ] button. To
restore the original display, press
the [ ] button again.
● Press the [ ] button to
restore single-image display.
● Smart Shufe is not available in the following cases:
- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera
- An unsupported image is currently displayed
- Images are shown in ltered display (
=
130)
137
ç Contents
Protecting Images
Still Images
Movies
Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the
camera (
=
142).
● Press the [
] button, and
then choose [ ] in the
menu (
=
47). [Protected] is
displayed.
● To cancel protection, repeat this
process and choose [
] again,
and then press the [ ] button.
● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format
the card (
=
170,
=
171).
● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure
function. To erase them this way, rst cancel protection.
138
ç Contents
Using the Menu
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button and
choose [Protect] on the [ ] tab
(
=
49).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Choose a menu item and an
option as desired (
=
49).
● To return to the menu screen,
press the [
] button.
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Using the
Menu” (
=
138), choose [Select]
and press the [ ] button.
139
ç Contents
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
]
button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify
other images.
3
Protect the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
A conrmation message is
displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or
turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in step 3.
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Using the
Menu” (
=
138), choose [Select
Range] and press the [ ] button.
140
ç Contents
2
Choose a starting image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an ending image.
● Press the [ ] button to choose
[Last image], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● Images before the rst image
cannot be selected as the last
image.
141
ç Contents
4
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose
[Protect], and then press the [ ]
button.
● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4.
Protecting All Images at Once
1
Choose [Protect All Images].
● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu”
(
=
138), choose [Protect All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
2
Protect the images.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Clearing All Protection at Once
You can clear protection from all images at once.
To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of
“Protecting All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2.
142
ç Contents
Erasing Images
Still Images
Movies
You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be
careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered.
However, protected images (
=
137) cannot be erased.
1
Choose an image to erase.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
2
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● After [Erase?] is displayed, press
the [
][ ] buttons to choose
[Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
● The current image is now erased.
● To cancel erasure, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel],
and then press the [ ] button.
143
ç Contents
Erasing Multiple Images at Once
You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when
erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However,
protected images (
=
137) cannot be erased.
Choosing a Selection Method
1
Access the setting screen.
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [Erase] on the [ ]
tab (
=
49).
2
Choose a selection method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose a selection method, and
then press the [ ] button.
● To return to the menu screen,
press the [
] button.
144
ç Contents
Choosing Images Individually
1
Choose [Select].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
143),
choose [Select] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose an image.
● Once you choose an image
following step 2 in “Choosing
Images Individually” (
=
138),
[ ] is displayed.
● To cancel selection, press the [
]
button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify
other images.
3
Erase the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
A conrmation message is
displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
145
ç Contents
Selecting a Range
1
Choose [Select Range].
● Following step 2 in “Choosing
a Selection Method” (
=
143),
choose [Select Range] and press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose images.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting
a Range” (
=
139) to specify
images.
3
Erase the images.
● Press the [ ] button to choose
[Erase], and then press the [ ]
button.
147
ç Contents
Rotating Images
Still Images
Movies
Change the orientation of images and save them as follows.
1
Choose [ ].
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [ ] in the menu
(
=
47).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ] or [ ] button,
depending on the desired
direction. Each time you press the
button, the image is rotated 90°.
Press the [ ] button to complete
the setting.
148
ç Contents
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Rotate].
● Press the [ ] button and
choose [Rotate] on the [ ] tab
(
=
49).
2
Rotate the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
● The image is rotated 90° each
time you press the [
] button.
● To return to the menu screen,
press the [
] button.
● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off]
(
=
149).
149
ç Contents
Deactivating Auto Rotation
Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which
rotates images based on the current camera orientation.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [Auto Rotate] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose [Off]
(
=
49).
● Images cannot be rotated (
=
147) when you set [Auto Rotate]
to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in
the original orientation.
● In Smart Shufe (
=
135) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set
to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and
rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation.
150
ç Contents
Tagging Images as Favorites
Still Images
Movies
You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By
choosing a category in ltered playback, you can restrict the
following operations to all of those images.
● “Viewing” (
=
124), “Viewing Slideshows” (
=
133),
“Protecting Images” (
=
137), “Erasing Images” (
=
142),
“Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (
=
200), “Adding
Images to a Photobook” (
=
205)
● Press the [
] button, and
then choose [ ] in the menu
(
=
47).
● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed.
● To untag the image, repeat this
process and choose [
] again,
and then press the [ ] button.
Using the Menu
1
Choose [Favorites].
● Press the [ ] button and
choose [Favorites] on the [ ]
tab (
=
49).
151
ç Contents
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed.
● To untag the image, press the
[
] button again. [ ] is no longer
displayed.
● Repeat this process to choose
additional images.
3
Finish the setup process.
● Press the [ ] button.
A conrmation message is
displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting
mode or turn the camera off before nishing the setup process in
step 3.
● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( )
when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7.
(Does not apply to movies.)
152
ç Contents
Editing Still Images
● Image editing (
=
152 –
=
159) is only available when the
memory card has sufcient free space.
Resizing Images
Still Images
Movies
Save a copy of images at a lower resolution.
1
Choose [Resize].
● Press the [ ] button and
choose [Resize] on the [ ] tab
(
=
49).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an image size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose the size, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [Save new image?] is displayed.
153
ç Contents
4
Save the new image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a
new le.
5
Review the new image.
● Press the [ ] button.
[Display new image?] is
displayed.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [Yes], and then press the
[ ] button.
● The saved image is now displayed.
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (
=
73).
● Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution.
154
ç Contents
Cropping
Still Images
Movies
You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image le.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [Cropping] on the
[ ] tab (
=
49).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Adjust the cropping area.
● A frame is displayed around
the portion of the image to be
cropped (1).
● The original image is shown in the
upper left, and a preview of the
image as cropped (2) is shown in
the lower right. You can also see
the resolution after cropping (3).
● To resize the frame, move the
zoom lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To change the frame orientation,
press the [
] button.
(
1
) (
2
) (
3
)
155
ç Contents
● Faces detected in the image are
enclosed in gray frames in the
upper-left image. To crop the image
based on this frame, press the [ ]
button to switch to the other frame.
● Press the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and
review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing
Images” (
=
152).
● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ]
(
=
73) or resized to [ ] (
=
152).
● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio
after cropping.
● Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped
images.
156
ç Contents
Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)
Still Images
Movies
You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as
a separate le. For details on each option, see “Changing Image
Color Tones (My Colors)” (
=
105).
1
Choose [My Colors].
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [My Colors] on the
[ ] tab (
=
49).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
4
Save as a new image and
review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing
Images” (
=
152).
● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little
lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color.
157
ç Contents
● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly
from the color of images shot using My Colors (
=
105).
Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)
Still Images
Movies
Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can
be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness.
Insufcient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected,
to make subjects stand out better. Choose from four correction
levels, and then save the image as a separate le.
1
Choose [i-Contrast].
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [i-Contrast] on the
[ ] tab (
=
49).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose an option.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
158
ç Contents
4
Save as a new image and
review.
● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing
Images” (
=
152).
● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause
images to appear grainy.
● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function.
● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting
images using [Low], [Medium], or [High].
Correcting Red-Eye
Still Images
Movies
Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save
the corrected image as a separate le.
1
Choose [Red-Eye Correction].
● Press the [ ] button, and
then choose [Red-Eye Correction]
on the [ ] tab (
=
49).
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
159
ç Contents
3
Correct the image.
● Press the [ ] button.
● Red-eye detected by the camera
is now corrected, and frames are
displayed around corrected image
areas.
● Enlarge or reduce images as
needed. Follow the steps in
“Magnifying Images” (
=
132).
4
Save as a new image and
review.
● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to
choose [New File], and then press
the [ ] button.
● The image is now saved as a
new le.
● Follow step 5 in “Resizing
Images” (
=
152).
● Some images may not be corrected accurately.
● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose
[Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be
erased.
● Protected images cannot be overwritten.
160
ç Contents
Editing Movies
Still Images
Movies
You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end.
1
Choose [ ].
● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing”
(
=
124), choose [ ] and press
the [ ] button.
● The movie editing panel and
editing bar are now displayed.
2
Specify portions to cut.
● (1) is the movie editing panel, and
(2) is the editing bar.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [ ] or [ ].
● To view the portions you can cut
(identied by [
] on the screen),
press the [ ][ ] buttons to move
[ ]. Cut the beginning of the
movie (from [ ]) by choosing
[ ], and cut the end of the movie
by choosing [ ].
● If you move [
] to a position other
than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion
before the nearest [ ] mark on
the left will be cut, while in [ ] the
portion after the nearest [ ] mark
on the right will be cut.
(
1
)
(
2
)
161
ç Contents
3
Review the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose
[ ], and then press the [ ] button.
The edited movie is now played.
● To edit the movie again, repeat
step 2.
● To cancel editing, press the
[
][ ] buttons to choose [ ].
Press the [ ] button, press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and
then press the [ ] button again.
4
Save the edited movie.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [ ], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons to
choose [New File], and then press
the [ ] button.
● The movie is now saved as a
new le.
● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite]
in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased.
● If the memory card lacks sufcient space, only [Overwrite] will be
available.
● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving
is in progress.
● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack
or an AC adapter kit (sold separately,
=
179).
162
ç Contents
6
Setting Menu
Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater
convenience
163
ç Contents
Adjusting Basic Camera Functions
MENU (
=
49) functions on the [ ] tab can be congured.
Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater
convenience.
Silencing Camera Operations
Silence camera sounds and movies as follows.
● Choose [Mute], and then choose
[On].
● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ]
button as you turn the camera on.
● Sound is not played during movies (
=
124) if you mute camera
sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [
] button.
Adjust volume with the [
][ ] buttons, as needed.
164
ç Contents
Adjusting the Volume
Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows.
● Choose [Volume], and then press
the [
] button.
● Choose an item, and then press
the [
][ ] buttons to adjust the
volume.
Hiding Hints and Tips
Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC.
(
=
47) or MENU (
=
49) items. If you prefer, you can
deactivate this information.
● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then
choose [Off].
165
ç Contents
Date and Time
Adjust the date and time as follows.
● Choose [Date/Time], and then
press the [
] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose an option, and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
setting.
World Clock
To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time
when you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance
and switch to that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates
the need to change the Date/Time setting manually.
Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and
your home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time”
(
=
31).
1
Specify your destination.
● Choose [Time Zone], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose the destination.
166
ç Contents
● To set daylight saving time (1 hour
ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the
[ ][ ] buttons, and then choose
[ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons.
● Press the [ ] button.
2
Switch to the destination time
zone.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [ World], and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is now shown on the shooting
screen (
=
221).
● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (
=
32) will
automatically update your [
Home] time and date.
Lens Retraction Timing
The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after
you press the [ ] button in Shooting mode (
=
43). To have
the lens retracted immediately after you press the [ ] button, set
the retraction timing to [0 sec.].
● Choose [Lens Retraction], and
then choose [0 sec.].
167
ç Contents
Using Eco Mode
This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting
mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens
to reduce battery consumption.
1
Congure the setting.
● Choose [Eco Mode], and then
choose [On].
● [ ] is now shown on the
shooting screen (
=
221).
● The screen darkens when
the camera is not used for
approximately two seconds;
approximately ten seconds after
darkening, the screen turns off. The
camera turns off after approximately
three minutes of inactivity.
2
Shoot.
● To activate the screen and
prepare for shooting when the
screen is off but the lens is still
out, press the shutter button
halfway.
168
ç Contents
Power-Saving Adjustment
Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation
(Auto Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed
(
=
44).
● Choose [Power Saving], and then
press the [
] button.
● After choosing an item, press
the [
][ ] buttons to adjust it as
needed.
● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for
[Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off].
● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power
Down] to [Off].
● These power-saving functions are not available when you have
set Eco mode (
=
167) to [On].
169
ç Contents
Screen Brightness
Adjust screen brightness as follows.
● Choose [LCD Brightness], and
then press the [
][ ] buttons to
adjust the brightness.
● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button
for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed
or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD
Brightness] setting on the [
] tab.) To restore the original
brightness, press and hold the [
] button again for at least
one second or restart the camera.
Hiding the Start-Up Screen
If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen
normally shown when you turn the camera on.
● Choose [Start-up Image], and
then choose [Off].
170
ç Contents
Formatting Memory Cards
Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another
device, you should format the card with this camera.
Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting,
copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other
steps to back them up.
An Eye-Fi card (
=
208) contains software on the card itself.
Before formatting an Eye-Fi card, install the software on a
computer.
1
Access the [Format] screen.
● Choose [Format], and then press
the [ ] button.
2
Choose [OK].
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Cancel], press the [ ][ ]
buttons to choose [OK], and then
press the [ ] button.
3
Format the memory card.
● To begin the formatting process,
press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● When formatting is nished,
[Memory card formatting complete]
is displayed. Press the [
] button.
171
ç Contents
● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes le
management information on the card and does not erase the data
completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards,
take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by
physically destroying cards.
● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be
less than the advertised capacity.
Low-Level Formatting
Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card
error] is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image
reading/writing is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie
recording suddenly stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on
a memory card. Before low-level formatting, copy images on the
memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up.
● On the screen in step 2
of “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
170), press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose [Low
Level Format], and then press
the [ ][ ] buttons to select this
option. A [ ] icon is displayed.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting
Memory Cards” (
=
170) to
continue with the formatting
process.
172
ç Contents
● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory
Cards” (
=
170), because data is erased from all storage regions
of the memory card.
● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing
[Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card
can be used normally.
File Numbering
Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 –
9999) and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You
can change how the camera assigns le numbers.
● Choose [File Numbering], and
then choose an option.
Continuous
Images are numbered consecutively (until the
9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch
memory cards.
Auto Reset
Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch
memory cards, or when a new folder is created.
173
ç Contents
● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be
numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images
on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001,
use an empty (or formatted (
=
170)) memory card.
Date-Based Image Storage
Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can
have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots
taken that day.
● Choose [Create Folder], and then
choose [Daily].
● Images will now be saved in
folders created on the shooting
date.
174
ç Contents
Checking Certication Logos
Some logos for certication requirements met by the camera can
be viewed on the screen. Other certication logos are printed in
this guide, on the camera packaging, or on the camera body.
● Choose [Certication Logo
Display], and then press the [
]
button.
Display Language
Change the display language as needed.
● Choose [Language
], and then
press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ][ ][ ] buttons
to choose a language, and then
press the [ ] button.
● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by
pressing and holding the [
] button and immediately pressing
the [
] button.
175
ç Contents
Adjusting Other Settings
The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab.
● [Video System] (
=
182)
● [Eye-Fi Settings] (
=
208)
Restoring Defaults
If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default
camera settings.
1
Access the [Reset All]
screen.
● Choose [Reset All], and then
press the [ ] button.
2
Restore default settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Default settings are now restored.
● The following functions are not restored to default settings.
- [
] tab settings [Date/Time] (
=
165), [Time Zone] (
=
165),
[Language
] (
=
174), and [Video System] (
=
182)
- Custom white balance data you have recorded (
=
105)
- Shooting mode (
=
85)
176
ç Contents
7
Accessories
Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories
and other compatible accessories sold separately
177
ç Contents
System Map
Wrist Strap
Battery Pack
NB-11LH*
1
Battery Charger
CB-2LF/CB-2LFE*
1
USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*
2
Memory Card Card Reader
Computer
TV/Video
System
AC Adapter Kit
ACK-DC90
Included Accessories
Power Cables
AV Cable AVC-DC400
Flash Unit
PictBridge-Compatible Printers
High-Power Flash
HF-DC2
Lens Cap
(with cord)
*1 Also available for purchase separately.
*2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable
IFC-400PCU).
178
ç Contents
Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when
used with genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or
accidents such as re, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-
genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion
of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not
apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a
chargeable basis.
179
ç Contents
Optional Accessories
The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that
availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer
be available.
Power Supplies
Battery Pack NB-11LH
● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Battery Charger CB-2LF/CB-2LFE
● Charger for Battery Pack NB-11LH
● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can
attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so
that
is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that
is not visible on an uncharged battery pack.
● Battery Pack NB-11L is also supported.
● Battery Charger CB-2LD and CB-2LDE are also supported.
180
ç Contents
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC90
● For powering the camera using
household power. Recommended
when using the camera over
extended periods, or when
connecting the camera to a
printer or computer. Cannot be
used to charge the battery pack in
the camera.
● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with
100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz).
● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially
available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer
designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack.
Flash Unit
High-Power Flash HF-DC2
● External ash for illuminating
subjects that are out of range of
the built-in ash.
181
ç Contents
Other Accessories
Interface Cable IFC-400PCU
● For connecting the camera to a
computer or printer.
AV Cable AVC-DC400
● Connect the camera to a TV to
enjoy playback on the larger TV
screen.
Printer
Canon-Brand PictBridge-
Compatible Printers
● Even without using a computer,
you can print images by
connecting the camera directly to
a printer.
For details, visit your nearest
Canon retailer.
182
ç Contents
Using Optional Accessories
Still Images
Movies
Playback on a TV
Still Images
Movies
Connecting the camera to a TV with the AV Cable AVC-DC400
(sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger
screen of the TV as you control the camera.
For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV
manual.
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
223).
1
Make sure the camera and TV
are off.
2
Connect the camera to the TV.
● On the TV, insert the cable plugs
fully into the video inputs as shown.
● Make sure the cable plugs are in
video inputs of the same color.
183
ç Contents
● On the camera, open the terminal
cover and insert the cable plug
fully into the camera terminal.
3
Turn the TV on and switch to
video input.
● Switch the TV input to the video
input you connected the cable to
in step 2.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the
camera on.
● Images from the camera are now
displayed on the TV. (Nothing is
displayed on the camera screen.)
● When nished, turn off the camera
and TV before disconnecting the
cable.
● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output
format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the
video output format, press the [
] button and choose
[Video System] on the [
] tab.
184
ç Contents
Powering the Camera with Household Power
Still Images
Movies
Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC90 (sold
separately) eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level.
1
Make sure the camera is off.
2
Open the cover.
● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the
Battery Pack and Memory Card”
(
=
28) to open the memory card/
battery cover, and then open the
coupler cable port cover as shown.
3
Insert the coupler.
● Holding the coupler with the
terminals (1) facing as shown,
insert the coupler just as you
would a battery pack (following
step 2 in “Inserting the Battery
Pack and Memory Card”
(
=
28)).
● Make sure the coupler cable
passes through the port (1).
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
1
)
(
1
)
185
ç Contents
4
Close the cover.
● Lower the cover (1) and hold it
down as you slide it, until it clicks
into the closed position (2).
5
Connect the power cord.
● Insert the adapter plug into the
end of the coupler cable.
● Insert one end of the power cord
into the compact power adapter,
and then plug the other end into a
power outlet.
● Turn the camera on and use it as
desired.
● When nished, turn the camera
off and unplug the power cord
from the outlet.
● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while
the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the
camera.
● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing
so could result in malfunction or damage to the product.
(
1
)
(
2
)
186
ç Contents
Using the Software
After downloading the software from the Canon website and
installing it on the computer you are using, you can do the
following things.
● CameraWindow
- Import images and change camera settings
● When viewing or editing images on a computer, always use
software that supports the images shot on the camera (software
normally installed on the computer or general-use software).
Checking Your Computer Environment
The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed
system requirements and compatibility information, including
support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website.
Operating
System
Windows Mac OS
Windows 8/8.1
Windows 7 SP1
Mac OS X 10.9
Mac OS X 10.8
● Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements,
including supported OS versions.
187
ç Contents
Installing the Software
Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of
illustration.
1
Download the software.
● With a computer connected to
the Internet, access http://www.
canon.com/icpd/.
● Access the site for your country
or region.
● Download the software.
2
Install the les.
● Click [Easy Installation] and follow
the on-screen instructions to
complete the installation process.
● Installation may take some
time, depending on computer
performance and the Internet
connection.
● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the
screen after installation.
● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and
access fees must be paid separately.
188
ç Contents
● Follow the steps below to uninstall (delete) the software.
- In Windows, click in the following order: [Start] menu > [All
Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the software you
want to uninstall.
- In Mac OS, click on [Applications] folder , choose the [Canon
Utilities] folder, drag the folder of the software you want to
uninstall to the trash, and then empty the trash.
Saving Images to a Computer
Connecting the camera to a computer with a commercial USB
cable (the camera terminal is Mini-B) enables you to import your
shots.
1
Connect the camera to the
computer.
● With the camera turned off, open
the cover (1). With the smaller
plug of the USB cable in the
orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal (2).
● Insert the larger plug of the USB
cable in the computer’s USB
port. For details about USB
connections on the computer,
refer to the computer user manual.
(
1
)
(
2
)
189
ç Contents
2
Turn the camera on to access
CameraWindow.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the
camera on.
● Mac OS: CameraWindow is
displayed when a connection is
established between the camera
and computer.
● Windows: Follow the steps
introduced below.
● In the screen that displays, click the
[ ] link to modify the program.
● Choose [Downloads Images From
Canon Camera] and then click
[OK].
● Double-click [
].
3
Save the images to the computer.
● Click [Import Images from
Camera], and then click [Import
Untransferred Images].
190
ç Contents
● Images are now saved to the
Pictures folder on the computer, in
separate folders named by date.
● After images are saved, close
CameraWindow, press the [
]
button to turn the camera off, and
unplug the cable.
● When viewing imported images on
a computer, always use software
that supports the images shot on
the camera (software normally
installed on the computer or
general-use software).
● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ]
icon in the taskbar.
● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the
[CameraWindow] icon in the Dock.
● Although you can save images to a computer simply by
connecting your camera to the computer without using the
software, the following limitations apply.
- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the
computer until camera images are accessible.
- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal
orientation.
- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved
to a computer.
- Some problems may occur when saving images or image
information, depending on the operating system version, the
software in use, or image le sizes.
191
ç Contents
Printing Images
Still Images
Movies
Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a
printer. On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch
printing, prepare orders for photo development services, and
prepare orders or print images for photobooks.
A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used
here for the sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available
functions vary by printer. Also refer to the printer manual for
additional information.
Easy Print
Still Images
Movies
Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge-
compatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable.
1
Make sure the camera and
printer are off.
192
ç Contents
2
Connect the camera to the
printer.
● Open the terminal cover. Holding
the smaller cable plug in the
orientation shown, insert the plug
fully into the camera terminal.
● Connect the larger cable plug to
the printer. For other connection
details, refer to the printer
manual.
3
Turn the printer on.
4
Turn the camera on.
● Press the [ ] button to turn the
camera on.
5
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image.
6
Access the printing screen.
● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ],
and press the [ ] button again.
193
ç Contents
7
Print the image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Print], and then press the
[ ] button.
● Printing now begins.
● To print other images, repeat the
above procedures starting from
step 5 after printing is nished.
● When you are nished printing,
turn the camera and printer off
and disconnect the cable.
● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately),
see “Printer” (
=
181).
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
191) to access this screen.
2
Congure the settings.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an item, and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose an option.
194
ç Contents
Default Matches current printer settings.
Date Prints images with the date added.
File No.
Prints images with the le number
added.
Both
Prints images with both the date and
le number added.
Off
–
Default Matches current printer settings.
Off
–
On
Uses information from the time of
shooting to print under optimal settings.
Red-Eye 1
Corrects red-eye.
No. of
Copies
Choose the number of copies to print.
Cropping
–
Specify a desired image area to print
(
=
195).
Paper
Settings
–
Specify the paper size, layout, and
other details (
=
196).
195
ç Contents
Cropping Images before Printing
Still Images
Movies
By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image
area instead of the entire image.
1
Choose [Cropping].
● After following step 1 in
“Conguring Print Settings”
(
=
193) to access the printing
screen, choose [Cropping] and
press the [ ] button.
● A cropping frame is now
displayed, indicating the image
area to print.
2
Adjust the cropping frame as
needed.
● To resize the frame, move the
zoom lever.
● To move the frame, press the
[
][ ][ ][ ] buttons.
● To rotate the frame, press the
[
] button.
● When nished, press the [ ] button.
3
Print the image.
● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print”
(
=
191) to print.
196
ç Contents
● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some
aspect ratios.
● Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with
[Date Stamp
] selected.
Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Paper Settings].
● After following step 1 in
“Conguring Print Settings”
(
=
193) to access the printing
screen, choose [Paper Settings]
and press the [ ] button.
2
Choose a paper size.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
3
Choose a type of paper.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option, and then press
the [ ] button.
197
ç Contents
4
Choose a layout.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an option.
● When choosing [N-up], press
the [
][ ] buttons to specify the
number of images per sheet.
● Press the [
] button.
5
Print the image.
Available Layout Options
Default Matches current printer settings.
Bordered Prints with blank space around the image.
Borderless Borderless, edge-to-edge printing.
N-up Choose how many images to print per sheet.
ID Photo
Prints images for identication purposes.
Only available for images with a resolution of L
and an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Fixed Size
Choose the print size.
Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format
prints.
198
ç Contents
Printing ID Photos
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [ID Photo].
● Following steps 1 – 4 in
“Choosing Paper Size and Layout
before Printing” (
=
196), choose
[ID Photo] and press the [ ]
button.
2
Choose the long and short
side length.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an item. Choose the length
by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and
then press the [ ] button.
3
Choose the printing area.
● Follow step 2 in “Cropping
Images before Printing” (
=
195)
to choose the printing area.
4
Print the image.
199
ç Contents
Printing Movie Scenes
Still Images
Movies
1
Access the printing screen.
● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print”
(
=
191) to choose a movie. This
screen is displayed.
2
Choose a printing method.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [ ], and then press the
[ ][ ] buttons to choose the
printing method.
3
Print the image.
Movie Printing Options
Single Prints the current scene as a still image.
Sequence
Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart,
on a single sheet of paper. You can also print the
folder number, le number, and elapsed time for
the frame by setting [Caption] to [On].
● To cancel printing, press the [ ] button, choose [OK], and then
press the [
] button again.
● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand
PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models.
200
ç Contents
Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
Batch printing (
=
204) and ordering prints from a photo
development service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to
998 images on a memory card and congure relevant settings,
such as the number of copies, as follows. The printing information
you prepare this way will conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order
Format) standards.
Conguring Print Settings
Still Images
Movies
Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or le number,
and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in
the print list.
● Press the [
] button, and
then choose [Print Settings]
on the [ ] tab. Choose and
congure items as desired
(
=
49).
201
ç Contents
Print Type
Standard One image is printed per sheet.
Index
Smaller versions of multiple images
are printed per sheet.
Both
Both standard and index formats are
printed.
Date
On
Images are printed with the shooting date.
Off
–
File No.
On Images are printed with the le number.
Off
–
Clear
DPOF data
On
All image print list settings are cleared
after printing.
Off
–
● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the
printer or photo development service, in some cases.
● [
] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
● Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date twice.
● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both
[Date] and [File No.] at the same time.
● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridge-
compatible printers (sold separately).
● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/
Time] on the [
] tab (
=
31).
202
ç Contents
Setting Up Printing for Individual Images
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select Images & Qty.].
● Press the [ ] button, choose
[Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ]
tab, and then press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an
image, and then press the [ ] button.
● You can now specify the number
of copies.
● If you specify index printing for
the image, it is labeled with a [
]
icon. To cancel index printing for
the image, press the [ ] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
3
Specify the number of prints.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify
the number of prints (up to 99).
● To set up printing for other images
and specify the number of prints,
repeat steps 2 – 3.
● Printing quantity cannot be
specied for index prints. You
can only choose which images to
print, by following step 2.
● When nished, press the [ ]
button to return to the menu screen.
203
ç Contents
Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up
Printing for Individual Images”
(
=
202), choose [Select Range]
and press the [ ] button.
● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting
a Range” (
=
139) to specify
images.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [Order], and then press
the [ ] button.
Setting Up Printing for All Images
Still Images
Movies
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up
Printing for Individual Images”
(
=
202), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
204
ç Contents
Clearing All Images from the Print List
● Following step 1 in “Setting Up
Printing for Individual Images”
(
=
202), choose [Clear All
Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)
Still Images
Movies
● When images have been added
to the print list (
=
200 –
=
203), this screen is displayed
after you connect the camera to
a PictBridge-compatible printer.
Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose [Print now], and then
simply press the [ ] button to
print the images in the print list.
● Any DPOF print job that you
temporarily stop will be resumed
from the next image.
205
ç Contents
Adding Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998
images on a memory card and importing them into the software
on your computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This
is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing
photobooks with your own printer.
Choosing a Selection Method
● Press the [ ] button,
choose [Photobook Set-up] on the
[ ] tab, and then choose how
you will select images.
● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the
memory card has print settings that were congured on another
camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may
overwrite all previous settings.
206
ç Contents
Adding Images Individually
Still Images
Movies
1
Choose [Select].
● Following the procedure in
“Choosing a Selection Method”
(
=
205), choose [Select] and
press the [ ] button.
2
Choose an image.
● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to
choose an image, and then press
the [ ] button.
● [
] is displayed.
● To remove the image from the
photobook, press the [
] button
again. [ ] is no longer displayed.
● Repeat this process to specify
other images.
● When nished, press the
[
] button to return to the
menu screen.
207
ç Contents
Adding All Images to a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in
“Choosing a Selection Method”
(
=
205), choose [Select All
Images] and press the [ ] button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
Removing All Images from a Photobook
Still Images
Movies
● Following the procedure in
“Choosing a Selection Method”
(
=
205), choose [Clear All
Selections] and press the [ ]
button.
● Press the [
][ ] buttons to
choose [OK], and then press the
[ ] button.
208
ç Contents
Using an Eye-Fi Card
Still Images
Movies
Before using an Eye-Fi card, always conrm that local use is
permitted (
=
3).
Inserting a prepared Eye-Fi card enables automatic wireless transfer
of images to a computer or uploading to a photo-sharing website.
Images are transferred by the Eye-Fi card. Refer to the card’s user
manual or contact the manufacturer for instructions on preparing
and using cards or resolving transfer problems.
● When using an Eye-Fi card, keep the following points in mind.
- Cards may continue to transmit radio waves even when [Eye-
Fi trans.] is set to [Disable] (
=
210). Remove the Eye-Fi
card before entering hospitals, aircraft, or other areas where
transmission is prohibited.
- When troubleshooting image transfer issues, check the card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s user manual.
- Poor Eye-Fi connections may cause image transfer to take a
long time, and transfer may be interrupted in some cases.
- Eye-Fi cards may become hot, due to their transfer functions.
- Battery power will be consumed faster than in normal use.
- Camera operation may become sluggish. To resolve this, try
setting [Eye-Fi trans.] to [Disable].
209
ç Contents
Connection status of Eye-Fi cards in the camera can be checked
on the shooting screen (in regular information display mode) or
playback screen (in simple information display mode).
(Gray)
Not connected
(Blinking white)
Connecting
(White)
Connected
(Animated)
Transfer in progress*
1
Interrupted
Not communicating
Error acquiring Eye-Fi card information*
2
*1 Power saving (
=
44) on the camera is temporarily disabled during
image transfer.
*2 Restart the camera. Repeated display of this icon may indicate a
problem with the card.
Images labeled with a [ ] icon have been transferred.
Checking Connection Information
Check the access point SSID used by the Eye-Fi card or the
connection status, as needed.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [Eye-Fi Settings] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Choose [Connection info], and
then press the [
] button.
● The connection information
screen is displayed.
210
ç Contents
Disabling Eye-Fi Transfer
Congure the setting as follows to disable Eye-Fi transfer by the
card, if necessary.
● Press the [
] button,
choose [Eye-Fi Settings] on the
[ ] tab, and then press the [ ]
button.
● Choose [Eye-Fi trans.], and then
choose [Disable].
● [Eye-Fi Settings] is not shown unless an Eye-Fi card is in the
camera with its write-protect tab in the unlocked position. For this
reason, you cannot change settings for an inserted Eye-Fi card if
the write-protect tab is in the locked position.
211
ç Contents
8
Appendix
Helpful information when using the camera
212
ç Contents
Troubleshooting
If you think there is a problem with the camera, rst check the
following. If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a
Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Power
Nothing happens when the power button is pressed.
● Conrm that the battery pack is charged (
=
26).
● Conrm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (
=
28).
● Conrm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (
=
28).
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the
terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
The battery pack runs out of power quickly.
● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the
battery pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring
that the terminals do not touch any metal objects.
● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the
terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times.
● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power
soon after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new
battery pack.
The lens is not retracted.
● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on.
Close the cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (
=
28).
The battery pack is swollen.
● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns.
However, if battery swelling prevents the battery pack from tting in the
camera, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
213
ç Contents
Display on a TV
Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (
=
182).
Shooting
Cannot shoot.
● In Playback mode (
=
123), press the shutter button halfway (
=
45).
Strange display on the screen under low light (
=
46).
Strange display on the screen when shooting.
● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images
but are recorded in movies.
- The screen may darken under bright light.
- The screen may icker under uorescent or LED lighting.
- Purplish banding may appear on the screen if you compose a shot
that includes a bright light source.
No date stamp is added to images.
● Congure the [Date Stamp ] setting (
=
31). Note that date stamps
are not added to images automatically, merely because you have
congured the [Date/Time] setting (
=
69).
● Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (
=
230) in which this
setting cannot be congured (
=
69).
[ ] ashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and
shooting is not possible (
=
58).
[ ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (
=
58).
● Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (
=
121).
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
117).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
102).
● Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still.
Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or
other means to secure the camera (
=
121).
214
ç Contents
Shots are out of focus.
● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it
all the way down to shoot (
=
45).
● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (
=
243).
● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (
=
79).
● Conrm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated.
● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (
=
110,
=
116).
No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when
the shutter button is pressed halfway.
● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try
composing the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before
you press the shutter button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter
button halfway repeatedly.
Subjects in shots look too dark.
● Raise the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
117).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
99).
● Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (
=
103,
=
157).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
100,
=
101).
Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [ ] (
=
54).
● Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (
=
99).
● Use AE lock or spot metering (
=
100,
=
101).
● Reduce the lighting on subjects.
Shots look too dark despite the ash ring (
=
58).
● Shoot within ash range (
=
242).
● Increase the ISO speed (
=
102).
Subjects in ash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out.
● Shoot within ash range (
=
242).
● Lower the ash and set the ash mode to [
] (
=
54).
White dots or similar image artifacts appear in ash shots.
● This is caused by light from the ash reecting off dust or airborne
particles.
215
ç Contents
Shots look grainy.
● Lower the ISO speed (
=
102).
Subjects are affected by red-eye.
● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (
=
80) to activate the red-eye reduction
lamp (
=
4) in ash shots. Note that while the red-eye reduction lamp
is on (for about one second), it is not possible to shoot, because the
lamp is counteracting red-eye. For best results, have subjects look at the
red-eye reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes
and shooting at closer range.
● Edit images using red-eye correction (
=
158).
Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous
shooting is slower.
● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (
=
171).
Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available.
● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions
Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab”
(
=
225 –
=
230).
Shooting Movies
The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted.
● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card
that supports high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed
time display is incorrect, the length of movies on the memory card
corresponds to the actual recording time (
=
170,
=
242).
[ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically.
● The camera’s internal memory buffer lled up as the camera could not record
to the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures.
- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card
(
=
171).
- Lower the image quality (
=
74).
- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (
=
242).
216
ç Contents
Zooming is not possible.
● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] mode (
=
89).
Playback
Playback is not possible.
● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to
rename les or alter the folder structure.
Playback stops, or audio skips.
● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting
on with the camera (
=
171).
● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory
cards that have slow read speeds.
● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and
audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate.
Sound is not played during movies.
● Adjust the volume (
=
164) if you have activated [Mute] (
=
163) or the
sound in the movie is faint.
● No sound is played for movies shot in [
] mode (
=
89) because
audio is not recorded in this mode.
Memory Card
The memory card is not recognized.
● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (
=
43).
217
ç Contents
Computer
Cannot transfer images to a computer.
● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try
reducing the transfer speed as follows.
- Press the [
] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ]
button down as you press the [
] and [ ] buttons at the same time.
On the next screen, press the [
][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then
press the [
] button.
Eye-Fi Cards
Cannot transfer images (
=
208).
218
ç Contents
On-Screen Messages
If an error message is displayed, respond as follows.
No memory card
● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the
memory card facing the correct way (
=
28).
Memory card locked
● The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position.
Switch the write-protect tab to the unlocked position (
=
28).
Cannot record!
● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot,
insert a memory card facing the correct way (
=
28).
Memory card error (
=
171)
● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a
supported memory card (
=
3) and have inserted it facing the correct
way (
=
28), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
Insufcient space on card
● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (
=
54,
=
83,
=
97) or edit images (
=
152). Either erase unneeded images
(
=
142) or insert a memory card with enough free space (
=
28).
Charge the battery (
=
26)
No Image.
● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed.
Protected! (
=
137)
Unidentied Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot
play back MOV/Cannot play back MP4
● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed.
● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on
a computer, or images shot with another camera.
219
ç Contents
Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shufe/
Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign
to category/Unselectable image.
● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed
or already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note
that starred (*) functions are not available for movies.
Magnify* (
=
132), Smart Shufe* (
=
135), Rotate* (
=
147), Favorites
(
=
150), Edit* (
=
152), Print List* (
=
200), and Photobook Set-up*
(
=
205).
Invalid selection range
● When specifying a range for image selection (
=
139,
=
145,
=
203), you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the
nal image, or vice-versa.
Exceeded selection limit
● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (
=
200) or
Photobook Set-up (
=
205). Choose 998 images or less.
● Print List (
=
200) or Photobook Set-up (
=
205) settings could not be
saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again.
● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (
=
137), Erase
(
=
142), Favorites (
=
150), Print List (
=
200), or Photobook Set-up
(
=
205).
Naming error!
● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded,
because the highest supported folder number (999) for storing images
on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number
(9999) for images in folders has been reached. On the [
] tab, change
[File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (
=
172), or format the memory card
(
=
170).
Lens Error
● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the
camera is used in dusty or sandy locations.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In
this case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
220
ç Contents
A camera error was detected (error number)
● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image
may not have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the
image.
● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage.
In this case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon
Customer Support Help Desk.
File Error
● Correct printing (
=
191) may not be possible for photos from other
cameras or images that have been altered using computer software,
even if the camera is connected to the printer.
Print error
● Check the paper size setting (
=
196). If this error message is displayed
when the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting
on the camera again.
Ink absorber full
● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance
with ink absorber replacement.
221
ç Contents
On-Screen Information
Shooting (Information Display)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
8
)
(
9
)(
10
) (
11
) (
12
) (
13
) (
14
) (
15
)
(
16
)
(
17
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
20
)
(
21
)
(
22
) (
23
) (
24
) (
25
) (
26
)
(
27
)
(
28
)
(
30
)
(
29
)
(
31
)
(
32
)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(1) Battery level (
=
222)
(2) White balance (
=
104)
(3) My Colors (
=
105)
(4) Drive mode (
=
71)
(5) Eco mode (
=
167)
(6) Self-timer (
=
66)
(7) Camera shake warning
(
=
58)
(8) Metering method (
=
101)
(9) Eye-Fi connection status
(
=
208)
(10)
Still image compression
(
=
120), Resolution (
=
73)
(11) Recordable shots (
=
241)
(12) Movie quality (
=
74)
(13) Remaining time (
=
242)
222
ç Contents
(14)
Digital zoom magnification
(
=
64), Digital tele-converter
(
=
109)
(15) Focusing range (
=
108,
=
109), AF lock (
=
116)
(16) Shooting mode (
=
225),
Scene icon (
=
60)
(17) Flash mode (
=
117)
(18) AF frame (
=
110), Spot AE
point frame (
=
101)
(19) Date stamp (
=
69)
(20) ISO speed (
=
102)
(21) i-Contrast (
=
103)
(22) Grid lines (
=
75)
(23) AE lock (
=
100), FE lock
(
=
119)
(24) Shutter speed
(25) Aperture value
(26) Exposure compensation level
(
=
99)
(27) Zoom bar (
=
54)
(28) IS mode icon (
=
62)
(29) Blink detection (
=
77)
(30) Time zone (
=
165)
(31) Image stabilization (
=
121)
(32)
Exposure compensation bar
(
=
99)
Battery Level
An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level.
Display Details
Sufcient charge
Slightly depleted, but sufcient
(Blinking red)
Nearly depleted—charge the battery
pack soon
[Charge the battery]
Depleted—charge the battery pack
immediately
223
ç Contents
Playback (Detailed Information Display)
(
1
)
(
2
)
(
3
)
(
4
)
(
5
)
(
6
)
(
7
)
(
8
) (
9
)(
10
) (
11
)
(
12
)
(
13
)
(
14
)
(
15
)
(
16
)
(
17
)
(
18
)
(
19
)
(
21
)(
22
) (
23
) (
24
) (
25
)(
20
)
(1) Movies (
=
54,
=
124)
(2) Shooting mode (
=
225)
(3) ISO speed (
=
102),
Playback speed (
=
90)
(4) Exposure compensation level
(
=
99)
(5) White balance (
=
104)
(6) Histogram (
=
128)
(7) Compression (image quality)
(
=
120) / Resolution
(
=
73), MOV (movies)
(8)
Transferred via Eye-Fi (
=
208)
(9) Battery level (
=
222)
(10) Metering method (
=
101)
(11) Folder number - File number
(
=
172)
(12) Current image no. / Total no.
of images
(13) Shutter speed (still images),
Image quality / Frame rate
(movies) (
=
74)
(14) Aperture value
(15) Flash (
=
117)
(16) i-Contrast (
=
103,
=
157)
(17) Focusing range
(
=
108,
=
109)
(18) File size
(19) Still images: Resolution
(
=
241)
Movies: Playback time
(
=
242)
(20) Image editing (
=
152)
224
ç Contents
(21) Protection (
=
137)
(22) Favorites (
=
150)
(23) My Colors (
=
105,
=
156)
(24) Red-eye correction (
=
158)
(25) Shooting date/time (
=
31)
● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on
a TV (
=
182).
Summary of Movie Control Panel
The following operations are available on the movie control panel
accessed as described in “Viewing” (
=
124).
Exit
Play
Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the
playback speed. No sound is played.)
Skip Backward* (To continue skipping backward, keep
holding down the [ ] button.)
Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the
[ ] button.)
Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ]
button.)
Skip Forward* (To continue skipping forward, keep holding
down the [ ] button.)
Edit (
=
160)
Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridge-
compatible printer (
=
191).
* Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame.
● To skip forward or back during movie playback, press the [ ][ ] buttons.
225
ç Contents
Functions and Menu Tables
Available or automatically set functions are indicated by black
icons, such as .
Unavailable functions are indicated by gray icons, such as .
Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode
Exposure Compensation (
=
99)
/ /
*
1
/ / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Self-Timer (
=
66)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Self-Timer Settings (
=
68)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash (
=
117)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
226
ç Contents
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*
2
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AE Lock/FE Lock (
=
100,
=
119)*
3
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF Lock (
=
116)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Focusing Range (
=
108,
=
109)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Tracking AF (
=
112)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
227
ç Contents
Change Display (
=
46)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*1 Settings [Dark ‒ Light].
*2 Not available, but switches to [
] in some cases.
*3 FE lock not available in [
] ash mode.
FUNC. Menu
Metering Method (
=
101)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
My Colors (
=
105)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / *
1
/ *
1
/ / / / / / / *
2
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
228
ç Contents
White Balance (
=
104)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
ISO Speed (
=
102)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / /
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Drive Mode (
=
71)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Still Image Aspect Ratio (
=
72)
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
230
ç Contents
Movie Quality (
=
74)
/
/ / / / / / /
*
3
/ / / / /
/ /
*1 White balance is not available.
*2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red,
green, blue, and skin tone.
*3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set
(
=
90).
Shooting Tab
AF Frame (
=
110)
Face AiAF*
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Tracking AF
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Center
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF Frame Size (
=
110)*
2
Normal
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
231
ç Contents
Small
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Digital Zoom (
=
64)
Standard
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
1.6x/2.0x
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF-Point Zoom (
=
76)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Servo AF (
=
114)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
232
ç Contents
Off*
3
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Continuous AF (
=
115)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
AF-assist Beam (
=
79)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Flash Settings (
=
80)
Red-Eye Lamp
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
i-Contrast (
=
103)
Auto
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
233
ç Contents
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Review image after shooting (
=
81)
Display Time
Off/Quick/2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Display Info
Off/Detailed
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Blink Detection (
=
77)
On
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Grid Lines (
=
75)
On/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
234
ç Contents
IS Settings (
=
121)
IS Mode
Continuous/Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Shoot Only
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Dynamic IS
1
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
2
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Date Stamp (
=
69)
Off
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
Date / Date & Time
/ / / / / / / / / / / /
/ /
*1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode.
*2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center].
*3 [On] when subject movement is detected in [
] mode.
235
ç Contents
Set Up Tab
Item Ref. Page
Mute
=
163
Volume
=
164
Hints & Tips
=
164
Date/Time
=
31
Time Zone
=
165
Lens Retraction
=
166
Eco Mode
=
167
Power Saving
=
44,
=
168
LCD Brightness
=
169
Start-up Image
=
169
Format
=
170,
=
171
File Numbering
=
172
Create Folder
=
173
Video System
=
182
Eye-Fi Settings
=
208
Certication Logo Display
=
174
Language
=
34
Reset All
=
175
238
ç Contents
Handling Precautions
● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid
dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact.
● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other
devices that generate strong electromagnetic elds, which may
cause malfunction or erase image data.
● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe
with a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub
hard or apply force.
● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the
camera or screen.
● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is
difcult, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk.
● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after
sudden temperature changes (when the camera is transferred
from cold to warm environments), put the camera in an
airtight, resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the
temperature before removing it from the bag.
● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it
immediately. Continuing to use the camera in this state may
damage it. Remove the battery pack and memory card, and
wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use.
● Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s
remaining charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in
a plastic bag or similar container. Storing a partially charged
battery pack over extended periods (about a year) may shorten
its life or affect performance.
239
ç Contents
Specications
Camera Specications
Camera Effective
Pixels (Max.)
Approx. 20.0 million pixels
Lens Focal
Length
40x zoom: 4.3 (W) – 172.0 (T) mm
(35mm lm equivalent: 24 (W) – 960 (T) mm)
LCD Monitor
3.0-type color TFT LCD
Effective Pixels: Approx. 230,000 dots
File Format
Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF
(version 1.1) compliant
Data Type
Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG)
Movies: MOV (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264;
Audio: Linear PCM (monaural))
Interface
Hi-speed USB
Analog audio output (monaural)
Analog video output (NTSC/PAL)
Power Source
Battery Pack NB-11LH
AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC90
Dimensions
(Based on CIPA
Guidelines)
104.4 x 69.1 x 85.1 mm (4.11 x 2.72 x 3.35 in.)
Weight (Based on
CIPA Guidelines)
Approx. 325 g (approx. 11.5 oz.; including
the battery pack and memory card)
Approx. 308 g (approx. 10.9 oz.; camera
body only)
240
ç Contents
Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm lm equivalent)
Digital Zoom [Standard]
24 – 3840 mm
(Represents the combined focal
length of optical and digital zoom.)
Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x 38.4 ‒ 1536 mm
Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 48.0 – 1920 mm
Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time
Number of Shots Approx. 185
Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Approx. 245
Movie Recording Time*
1
Approx. 45 minutes
Movie Recording Time
(Continuous Shooting*
2
)
Approx. 1 hour 35 minutes
Playback Time Approx. 4 hours
*1 Times are under the following shooting conditions.
- AUTO mode
- Image quality [
]
- Repeated shooting, stopping, zooming, turning power on/off
*2 Times are under the following shooting conditions.
- AUTO mode
- Image quality [
]
- No operations such as zooming
- Shooting immediately resumed after automatically stopping when the
le size reaches 4 GB or the recording time reaches 29 min. 59 sec
*3 Time for still images played back in a slideshow.
● The number of shots that can be taken is based on
measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products
Association (CIPA).
241
ç Contents
● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and
recording time may be less than mentioned above.
● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack.
Number of Shots per Memory Card
The number of shots at an aspect ratio (
=
72) of 4:3 per memory
card is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by
aspect ratio.
Recording Pixels
Compression
Ratio
Number of Shots per Memory
Card (Approx. shots)
16 GB
(Large)
20M/
5152x3864
1698
2760
(Medium 1)
10M/
3648x2736
3217
5061
(Medium 2)
3M/2048x1536
9344
16755
(Small)
0.3M/640x480
53992
80988
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement
conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory
card and camera settings.
242
ç Contents
Recording Time per Memory Card
Image
Quality
Recording Time per Memory Card
16 GB
2 hr. 21 min. 58 sec.
6 hr. 44 min. 38 sec.
● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement
conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory
card and camera settings.
● Recording will automatically stop when the clip le size
reaches 4 GB, or when the recording time reaches
approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in
[
], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [ ].
● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not
been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 2 or
higher memory cards are recommended.
Flash Range
Maximum wide angle ( )
50 cm – 5.0 m (1.6 – 16 ft.)
Maximum telephoto (
)
1.4 – 2.7 m (4.6 – 8.9 ft.)
243
ç Contents
Shooting Range
Shooting
Mode
Focusing
Range
Maximum Wide
Angle ( )
Maximum Telephoto
( )
–
0 cm (0 in.) – innity
1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – innity
Other
modes
5 cm (2.0 in.) – innity
1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – innity
*
0 – 50 cm
(0 in. – 1.6 ft.)
–
*
3.0 m (9.8 ft.) – innity 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) – innity
Not available in some shooting modes.
Continuous Shooting Speed
Shooting Mode Speed
Approx. 0.5 shots/sec.
Approx. 2.2 shots/sec.
Shutter Speed
[ ] mode,
automatically set range
1 – 1/4000 sec.
Aperture
f/number f/3.5 – f/8.0 (W), f/6.3 – f/8.0 (T)
244
ç Contents
Battery Pack NB-11LH
Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC
Nominal Capacity: 800 mAh
Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times
Operating Temperatures
: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)
Battery Charger CB-2LF/CB-2LFE
Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.41 A
Charging Time:
Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. (when using NB
-
11LH)
Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green
(two-indicator system)
Operating Temperatures
: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F)
245
ç Contents
Index
A
AC adapter kit ................ 180, 184
Accessories ........................... 179
AE lock .................................. 100
AF frames ...............................110
AF lock....................................116
Aspect ratio.............................. 72
AUTO mode
(shooting mode) .............. 36, 54
AV cable ........................ 181, 182
B
Batteries
→
Date/time (date/time battery)
Power saving .................... 44
Battery charger .................. 2, 179
Battery pack
Charging ........................... 26
Eco mode ....................... 167
Level ............................... 222
Power saving .................... 44
Black and white images ......... 106
Blink detection ......................... 77
C
Camera
Reset all ......................... 175
CameraWindow (computer)... 186
Center (AF frame mode).........110
Clock........................................ 52
Color (white balance)............. 104
Compression ratio
(image quality) .................... 120
Cropping ........................ 154, 195
Custom white balance ........... 105
D
Date/time
Adding date stamps ......... 69
Changing .......................... 32
Date/time battery .............. 33
Settings ............................ 31
World clock ..................... 165
DC coupler............................. 184
Defaults
→
Reset all
Digital tele-converter.............. 109
Digital zoom ............................. 64
Display language ..................... 34
246
ç Contents
DPOF ..................................... 200
E
Eco mode .............................. 167
Editing
Cropping ......................... 154
i-Contrast ........................ 157
My Colors ....................... 156
Red-eye correction ......... 158
Resizing images ............. 152
Erasing .................................. 142
Erasing all .............................. 146
Error messages ..................... 218
Exposure
AE lock ........................... 100
Compensation .................. 99
FE lock ............................119
Eye-Fi cards ...................... 3, 208
F
Face AiAF
(AF frame mode) .................111
Face self-timer
(shooting mode) .................... 93
Favorites ................................ 150
FE lock....................................119
File numbering ....................... 172
Fireworks (shooting mode) ...... 86
Fish-eye effect
(shooting mode) .................... 88
Flash
Off....................................118
On ...................................118
Slow synchro ...................118
Focusing
AF frames ........................ 110
AF lock ............................116
AF-point zoom .................. 76
Servo AF .........................114
Focusing range
Innity ............................. 109
Macro ............................. 108
Focus lock ..............................111
FUNC. menu
Basic operations ............... 47
Table ....................... 227, 237
G
Grid lines ................................. 75
H
Household power................... 184
247
ç Contents
I
i-Contrast ....................... 103, 157
Image quality
→
Compression ratio
(image quality)
Images
Display period .................. 81
Erasing ........................... 142
Playback
→
Viewing
Protecting ....................... 137
Image stabilization ................. 121
Indicator ................................... 51
Innity (focusing range) ......... 109
ISO speed.............................. 102
L
Lamp........................................ 80
Live View Control
(shooting mode) .................... 84
Long shutter (shooting mode).. 95
Low light (shooting mode) ....... 85
M
Macro (focusing range).......... 108
Magnied display ................... 132
Memory cards ............................ 3
Recording time ............... 242
Menu
Basic operations ............... 49
Table ............................... 225
Metering method.................... 101
Miniature effect
(shooting mode) .................... 89
Monochrome
(shooting mode) .................... 92
Movies
Editing ............................ 160
Image quality
(resolution/frame rate) ... 74
Recording time ............... 242
My Colors ...................... 105, 156
P
P (shooting mode) ................... 98
Package contents ...................... 2
Photobook set-up .................. 205
PictBridge ...................... 181, 191
Playback
→
Viewing
Portrait (shooting mode) .......... 85
Poster effect
(shooting mode) .................... 87
Power .................................... 179
→
AC adapter kit
→
Battery charger
→
Battery pack
248
ç Contents
Power saving ........................... 44
Printing .................................. 191
Program AE ............................. 98
Protecting .............................. 137
R
Red-eye correction ................ 158
Reset all................................. 175
Resizing images .................... 152
Resolution (image size) ........... 73
Rotating ................................. 147
S
Saving images to
a computer .......................... 188
Screen
Display language .............. 34
Icons ....................... 221, 223
Menu
→
FUNC. menu
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards
→
Memory cards
Searching .............................. 130
Self-timer ................................. 66
2-second self-timer ........... 67
Customizing the
self-timer........................ 68
Face self-timer
(shooting mode) ............ 93
Sepia tone images ................. 106
Servo AF ................................. 114
Shooting
Shooting date/time
→
Date/time
Shooting information ...... 221
Slideshow .............................. 133
Smart Shufe ......................... 135
Snow (shooting mode)............. 86
Software
Installation ...................... 187
Saving images to
a computer .................. 188
Sounds .................................. 163
Strap .................................... 2, 25
Super vivid (shooting mode) .... 87
T
Terminal ......................... 183, 192
Toy camera effect
(shooting mode) .................... 91
Tracking AF ............................112
Traveling with the camera ..... 165
Troubleshooting ..................... 212
TV display .............................. 182
249
ç Contents
V
Viewing .................................... 39
Image search ................. 130
Index display .................. 129
Magnied display ........... 132
Single-image display ........ 39
Slideshow ....................... 133
Smart Shufe ................. 135
TV display ...................... 182
W
White balance (color)............. 104
World clock ............................ 165
Wrist strap
→
Strap
Z
Zoom ........................... 37, 55, 64
250
ç Contents
Trademarks and Licensing
● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/
or other countries.
● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other countries.
● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
● All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from
Microsoft.
● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4
standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant
video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was
encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose
or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents
to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or
implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.
Disclaimer
● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited.
● All measurements based on Canon testing standards.
● Information subject to change without notice, as are product
specications and appearance.
● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly
from the actual equipment.
● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable
for any loss arising from the use of this product.
Documenttranscriptie
Camera User Guide ●● Make sure you read this guide, including the “Safety Precautions” (= 18) section, before using the camera. ●● Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly. ●● Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future. Switching Between Pages Click the button on the top of the screen. ç Contents : return to the Contents. English © CANON INC. 2015 CDJ-E636-010 2 ç Contents Before Use Initial Information Package Contents Before use, make sure the following items are included in the package. If anything is missing, contact your camera retailer. Camera Battery Pack NB-11LH* Wrist Strap Lens Cap (with cord) * Do not peel off the battery pack label. ●● Printed matter is also included. ●● A memory card is not included (= 3). Battery Charger CB-2LF/CB-2LFE ç Contents 3 Compatible Memory Cards The following memory cards (sold separately) can be used, regardless of capacity. ●● SD memory cards* ●● SDHC memory cards* ●● SDXC memory cards* ●● Eye-Fi cards * Cards conforming to SD standards. However, not all memory cards have been verified to work with the camera. About Eye-Fi Cards This product is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card functions (including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that an approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in the area, please check with the card manufacturer. 4 ç Contents Part Names and Conventions in This Guide (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (3) (8) (6) (9) ( 7) (1) Zoom lever Shooting: [ [ Playback: [ [ (4) (telephoto)] / (wide angle)] (magnify)] / (index)] Power button (5) Flash (6) Lamp (7) Lens (2) Shutter button (8) Tripod socket (3) Strap mount (9) Memory card/battery cover ç Contents 5 ●● Shooting modes and on-screen icons and text are indicated in brackets. ●● : Important information you should know ●● : Notes and tips for expert camera use ●● =xx: Pages with related information (in this example, “xx” represents a page number) ●● Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings. ●● For convenience, all supported memory cards are simply referred to as the “memory card”. ●● The symbols “ Still Images” and “ Movies” below titles indicate how the function is used—whether for still images or movies. 6 ç Contents (1) (2) (3) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (4) (5) (1) Speaker (2) Microphone (3) AV OUT (Audio/video output) / DIGITAL terminal (4) Screen (LCD monitor) (5) DC coupler cable port (6) Indicator (7) [ (8) (Playback)] button Movie button (9) [ (Auto)] button (14) (15) (16) (10) [ (Exposure compensation)] / Up button (11) FUNC./SET button (12) [ (Flash)] / Right button (13) [ (Self-timer)] / [ (Singleimage erase)] / Down button (14) [ (Focusing range)] / Left button (15) [ (16) [ (Display)] button ] button ●● In this guide, icons are used to represent the corresponding camera buttons on which they appear, or which they resemble. ●● The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons. [ ] Right button (12) on back [ ] Up button (10) on back [ ] Left button (14) on back [ ] Down button (13) on back ç Contents 7 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information ●● Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were recorded correctly. Please note that Canon Inc., its subsidiaries and affiliates, and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory, including memory cards, that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable. ●● Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use. Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law, and note that even for personal use, photography may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions, or in some commercial settings. ●● The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase. In case of camera problems while abroad, return to the area of purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ●● Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely highprecision manufacturing conditions and more than 99.99% of the pixels meet design specifications, in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as red or black dots. This does not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images. ●● The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection against scratches during shipment. If covered, remove the film before using the camera. ●● When the camera is used over an extended period, it may become warm. This does not indicate damage. 8 ç Contents Table of Contents Before Use Initial Information................ 2 Package Contents.................. 2 Compatible Memory Cards.... 3 About Eye-Fi Cards....... 3 Part Names and Conventions in This Guide........................... 4 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information.............................. 7 Common Camera Operations............................ 15 Safety Precautions............... 18 Basic Guide Basic Operations............... 24 Initial Preparations............... 25 Attaching Accessories................. 25 Holding the Camera.... 26 Charging the Battery Pack.............................. 26 Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card.............................. 28 Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card.......................... 30 Setting the Date and Time.............................. 31 Changing the Date and Time.......................... 32 Display Language....... 34 Trying the Camera Out......... 36 Shooting (Smart Auto)................. 36 Viewing......................... 39 Erasing Images......... 41 Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics............... 42 On/Off.................................... 43 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down)..... 44 Power Saving in Shooting Mode......... 44 Power Saving in Playback Mode......... 44 Shutter Button...................... 45 Shooting Display Options... 46 Using the FUNC. Menu......... 47 Using the Menu Screen........ 49 Indicator Display.................. 51 Clock...................................... 52 2 Auto Mode...................... 53 Shooting with CameraDetermined Settings............ 54 Shooting (Smart Auto)................. 54 ç Contents 9 Still Images/Movies... 58 Helpful Shooting Features... 75 Still Images............... 58 Displaying Grid Lines............................. 75 Movies...................... 59 Scene Icons................. 60 Image Stabilization Icons............................. 62 On-Screen Frames...... 63 Common, Convenient Features................................ 64 Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom).............. 64 Using the Self-Timer... 66 Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake....................... 67 Customizing the Self-Timer................. 68 Adding a Date Stamp........................... 69 Continuous Shooting....................... 71 Image Customization Features................................ 72 Changing the Aspect Ratio............................. 72 Changing Image Resolution (Size)......... 73 Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images)..................... 73 Changing Movie Image Quality.......................... 74 Magnifying the Area in Focus............................ 76 Checking for Closed Eyes.............................. 77 Customizing Camera Operation.............................. 79 Deactivating the AFAssist Beam................. 79 Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp.......... 80 Changing the Image Display Style after Shots............................ 81 Changing the Image Display Period after Shots........................ 81 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots........................ 82 3 Other Shooting Modes.............................. 83 Brightness / Color Customization (Live View Control)................................. 84 Specific Scenes.................... 85 Applying Special Effects..... 87 Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect).......... 88 Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect)......... 89 ç Contents 10 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips)........................ 90 Adjusting White Balance...................... 104 Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect).... 91 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)..... 105 Shooting in Monochrome................ 92 Special Modes for Other Purposes............................... 93 Using the Face SelfTimer............................ 93 Shooting Long Exposures (Long Shutter)........................ 95 4 P Mode............................ 97 Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode).............................. 98 Image Brightness (Exposure)............................. 99 Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation)............ 99 Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock)................... 100 Changing the Metering Method....................... 101 Changing the ISO Speed......................... 102 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)................. 103 Image Colors....................... 104 Custom White Balance................... 105 Custom Color.......... 107 Shooting Range and Focusing............................. 108 Shooting Close-Ups (Macro)....................... 108 Shooting Distant Subjects (Infinity)...... 109 Digital TeleConverter................... 109 Changing the AF Frame Mode........................... 110 Center..................... 110 Face AiAF................111 Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF).......... 112 Shooting with Servo AF........................... 114 Changing the Focus Setting........................ 115 Shooting with the AF Lock............................ 116 Flash.................................... 117 Changing the Flash Mode........................... 117 Auto........................ 117 On........................... 118 Slow Synchro.......... 118 Off........................... 118 ç Contents Shooting with the FE Lock............................ 119 Other Settings..................... 120 Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality).......... 120 Changing the IS Mode Settings...................... 121 Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting................. 122 5 Playback Mode............. 123 Viewing................................ 124 Switching Display Modes......................... 127 Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights)............... 128 Histogram............... 128 Browsing and Filtering Images................................. 129 Navigating through Images in an Index.... 129 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions................. 130 Image Viewing Options...... 132 Magnifying Images.... 132 Viewing Slideshows................ 133 Changing Slideshow Settings................... 134 Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle).......... 135 11 Protecting Images.............. 137 Using the Menu......... 138 Choosing Images Individually................ 138 Selecting a Range..... 139 Protecting All Images at Once........................... 141 Clearing All Protection at Once................... 141 Erasing Images................... 142 Erasing Multiple Images at Once....................... 143 Choosing a Selection Method.................... 143 Choosing Images Individually.............. 144 Selecting a Range.. 145 Specifying All Images at Once................... 146 Rotating Images................. 147 Using the Menu......... 148 Deactivating Auto Rotation...................... 149 Tagging Images as Favorites............................. 150 Using the Menu......... 150 Editing Still Images............ 152 Resizing Images........ 152 Cropping.................... 154 Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)..... 156 Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast)................. 157 ç Contents Correcting Red-Eye... 158 Editing Movies.................... 160 6 Setting Menu................ 162 12 7 Accessories.................. 176 System Map........................ 177 Optional Accessories......... 179 Adjusting Basic Camera Functions............................ 163 Power Supplies......... 179 Silencing Camera Operations................. 163 Other Accessories..... 181 Adjusting the Volume........................ 164 Hiding Hints and Tips............................. 164 Date and Time............ 165 World Clock............... 165 Lens Retraction Timing......................... 166 Using Eco Mode........ 167 Power-Saving Adjustment................ 168 Screen Brightness.... 169 Hiding the Start-Up Screen........................ 169 Formatting Memory Cards.......................... 170 Low-Level Formatting.............. 171 File Numbering.......... 172 Date-Based Image Storage....................... 173 Checking Certification Logos......................... 174 Display Language..... 174 Adjusting Other Settings...................... 175 Restoring Defaults.... 175 Flash Unit................... 180 Printer......................... 181 Using Optional Accessories........................ 182 Playback on a TV....... 182 Powering the Camera with Household Power......................... 184 Using the Software............. 186 Checking Your Computer Environment.............. 186 Installing the Software..................... 187 Saving Images to a Computer................... 188 Printing Images.................. 191 Easy Print................... 191 Configuring Print Settings...................... 193 Cropping Images before Printing........ 195 Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing................... 196 Available Layout Options................... 197 Printing ID Photos... 198 Printing Movie Scenes........................ 199 ç Contents Movie Printing Options................... 199 Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)....... 200 Configuring Print Settings................... 200 Setting Up Printing for Individual Images.... 202 Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images.... 203 Setting Up Printing for All Images............... 203 Clearing All Images from the Print List... 204 Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF)................... 204 13 On-Screen Information...... 221 Shooting (Information Display)...................... 221 Battery Level........... 222 Playback (Detailed Information Display)...................... 223 Summary of Movie Control Panel.......... 224 Functions and Menu Tables.................................. 225 Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode........................... 225 FUNC. Menu............... 227 Shooting Tab.............. 230 Adding Images to a Photobook................. 205 Set Up Tab.................. 235 Choosing a Selection Method.................... 205 Print Tab..................... 237 Adding Images Individually.............. 206 Adding All Images to a Photobook.............. 207 Removing All Images from a Photobook... 207 Using an Eye-Fi Card......... 208 Checking Connection Information................ 209 Disabling Eye-Fi Transfer...................... 210 8 Appendix....................... 211 Troubleshooting................. 212 On-Screen Messages......... 218 Playback Tab............. 236 Playback Mode FUNC. Menu........................... 237 Handling Precautions........ 238 Specifications..................... 239 Camera Specifications............ 239 Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm film equivalent).............. 240 Number of Shots/ Recording Time, Playback Time........ 240 Number of Shots per Memory Card.......... 241 Recording Time per Memory Card.......... 242 ç Contents Flash Range........... 242 Shooting Range...... 243 Continuous Shooting Speed..................... 243 Shutter Speed......... 243 Aperture.................. 243 Battery Pack NB-11LH................. 244 Battery Charger CB-2LF/CB-2LFE... 244 Index.................................... 245 Trademarks and Licensing................ 250 Disclaimer............... 250 14 15 ç Contents Common Camera Operations Shoot ●● Use camera-determined settings (Auto Mode) -- = 54 Shooting people well Portraits (= 85) Against Snow (= 85) Matching specific scenes Low Light (= 85) Fireworks (= 85) Applying special effects Vivid Colors (= 87) Poster Effect (= 87) Fish-Eye Effect (= 88) Miniature Effect (= 89) Toy Camera Effect (= 91) Monochrome (= 92) ç Contents ●● While adjusting image settings (Live View Control) -- = 84 ●● Focus on faces -- = 54, = 85, = 111 ●● Without using the flash (Flash Off) -- = 54 ●● Include yourself in the shot (Self-Timer) -- = 66, = 93 ●● Add a date stamp -- = 69 View ●● View images (Playback Mode) -- = 124 ●● Automatic playback (Slideshow) -- = 133 ●● On a TV -- = 182 ●● On a computer -- = 186 ●● Browse through images quickly -- = 129 ●● Erase images -- = 142 16 ç Contents Shoot/View Movies ●● Shoot movies -- = 54 ●● View movies (Playback Mode) -- = 124 Print ●● Print pictures -- = 191 Save ●● Save images to a computer -- = 188 17 18 ç Contents Safety Precautions ●● Before using the product, ensure that you read the safety precautions described below. Always ensure that the product is used correctly. ●● The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and other persons from being injured or incurring property damage. ●● Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use. Warning Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death. ●● Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people’s eyes. Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight. In particular, remain at least 1 meter (3.3 feet) away from infants when using the flash. ●● Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants. A strap wound around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. If your product uses a power cord, mistakenly winding the cord around a child’s neck may result in asphyxiation. ●● Use only recommended power sources. ●● Do not disassemble, alter, or apply heat to the product. ●● Do not peel off the label, if the battery pack has one. ●● Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts. ●● Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken, such as when dropped. ç Contents 19 ●● Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange smell, or otherwise behaves abnormally. ●● Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol, benzine, or thinner to clean the product. ●● Avoid contact with liquid, and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside. This could result in electrical shock or fire. If the product gets wet, or if liquid or foreign objects get inside, remove the battery pack/batteries or unplug immediately. ●● Do not look through the viewfinder (if your model has one) at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. This could damage your eyesight. ●● Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in. This could result in electrical shock or fire. Immediately stop using the product and distance yourself from it. ●● Use only the recommended battery pack/batteries. ●● Do not place the battery pack/batteries near or in direct flame. This may cause the battery pack/batteries to explode or leak, resulting in electrical shock, fire, or injuries. If leaking battery electrolyte comes into contact with eyes, mouth, skin, or clothing, immediately flush with water. ç Contents 20 ●● If the product uses a battery charger, note the following precautions. -- Remove the plug periodically and, using a dry cloth, wipe away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug, the exterior of the power outlet, and the surrounding area. -- Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands. -- Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories. Do not use if the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet. -- Do not allow dust or metal objects (such as pins or keys) to contact the terminals or plug. -- Do not cut, damage, alter, or place heavy items on the power cord, if your product uses one. This could result in electrical shock or fire. ●● Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited. The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices. Exercise adequate caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices is restricted, such as inside airplanes and medical facilities. ●● Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended periods. Even if the camera does not feel hot, this may cause lowtemperature burns, manifested in redness of the skin or blistering. Use a tripod in hot places, or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin. 21 ç Contents Caution Denotes the possibility of injury. ●● When carrying the product by the strap, be careful not to bang it, subject it to strong impacts or shocks, or let it get caught on other objects. ●● Be careful not to bump or push strongly on the lens. This could lead to injury or damage the camera. ●● Be careful not to subject the screen to strong impacts. If the screen cracks, injury may result from the broken fragments. ●● When using the flash, be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing. This could result in burns or damage to the flash. ●● Avoid using, placing, or storing the product in the following places: -- Places subject to direct sunlight -- Places subject to temperatures above 40 °C (104 °F) -- Humid or dusty places These could cause leakage, overheating, or an explosion of the battery pack/batteries, resulting in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock, fire, burns, or other injuries. ●● The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed for prolonged periods. ●● When using optional lenses, lens filters, or filter adapters (if applicable), be sure to attach these accessories firmly. If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off, it may crack, and the shards of glass may lead to cuts. 22 ç Contents ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, make sure to avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash. This could result in injury. Caution Denotes the possibility of property damage. ●● Do not aim the camera at intense light sources, such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components. ●● When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location, be careful not to allow dust or sand to enter the camera. ●● On products that raise and lower the flash automatically, do not push the flash down or pry it open. This may cause the product to malfunction. ●● Wipe off any dust, grime, or other foreign matter on the flash with a cotton swab or cloth. The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the product to malfunction. ●● Remove and store the battery pack/batteries when you are not using the product. Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage. ●● Before you discard the battery pack/batteries, cover the terminals with tape or other insulators. Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions. ç Contents 23 ●● Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use. Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use. Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort, resulting in fire. ●● Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets. Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage, overheating, or explosion, resulting in product damage or fire. ●● If your product uses multiple batteries, do not use batteries that have different levels of charge together, and do not use old and new batteries together. Do not insert the batteries with the + and – terminals reversed. This may cause the product to malfunction. ●● Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. ●● When putting the camera in your bag, ensure that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen. Also close the screen (so that it faces the body), if your product’s screen closes. ●● Do not attach any hard objects to the product. Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen. 24 ç Contents Basic Guide Basic Operations Basic information and instructions, from initial preparations to shooting and playback 25 ç Contents Initial Preparations Prepare for shooting as follows. Attaching Accessories 1 Attach the strap. (2) (1) ●● Thread the end of the strap through the strap hole (1), and then pull the other end of the strap through the loop on the threaded end (2). 2 Attach the lens cap. ●● Remove the lens cap from the lens momentarily, thread the end of the strap through the strap hole (1), and then pull the lens cap through the loop (2). ●● Always remove the lens cap before turning the camera on. ●● Keep the lens cap on the lens when the camera is not in use. (1) (2) 26 ç Contents Holding the Camera ●● Place the strap around your wrist. ●● When shooting, keep your arms close to your body and hold the camera securely to prevent it from moving. If you have raised the flash, do not rest your fingers on it. Charging the Battery Pack Before use, charge the battery pack with the included charger. Be sure to charge the battery pack initially, because the camera is not sold with the battery pack charged. (1) (2) 1 Insert the battery pack. ●● After aligning the marks on the battery pack and charger, insert the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and down (2). 27 ç Contents 2 Charge the battery pack. (1 ) (2) CB-2LF ●● CB-2LF: Flip out the plug (1) and plug the charger into a power outlet (2). ●● CB-2LFE: Plug the power cord into the charger, then plug the other end into a power outlet. ●● The charging lamp turns orange, and charging begins. CB-2LFE (1) (2) ●● When charging is finished, the lamp turns green. 3 Remove the battery pack. ●● After unplugging the battery charger, remove the battery pack by pushing it in (1) and up (2). ●● To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition, do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours. ●● For battery chargers that use a power cord, do not attach the charger or cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. 28 ç Contents ●● For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time possible with a fully charged battery pack, see “Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time” (= 240). ●● Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge, even when they are not used. Charge the battery pack on (or immediately before) the day of use. ●● The charger can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card Insert the included battery pack and a memory card (sold separately). Note that before using a new memory card (or a memory card formatted in another device), you should format the memory card with this camera (= 170). 1 Open the cover. (2 ) ●● Slide the cover (1) and open it (2). (1) 29 ç Contents 2 Insert the battery pack. ●● Holding the battery pack with the terminals (1) facing as shown, press the battery lock (2) in the direction of the arrow and insert the battery pack until the lock clicks shut. (1) (2) ●● If you insert the battery pack facing the wrong way, it cannot be locked into the correct position. Always confirm that the battery pack is facing the right way and locks when inserted. 3 Check the card’s write- protect tab and insert the memory card. (1) ●● Recording is not possible on memory cards with a write-protect tab when the tab is in the locked position. Slide the tab to the unlocked position. ●● Insert the memory card with the label (1) facing as shown until it clicks into place. ●● Make sure the memory card is facing the right way when you insert it. Inserting memory cards facing the wrong way may damage the camera. 30 ç Contents 4 Close the cover. (1) (2) ●● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as you slide it, until it clicks into the closed position (2). ●● For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 241). Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card Remove the battery pack. ●● Open the cover and press the battery lock in the direction of the arrow. ●● The battery pack will pop up. Remove the memory card. ●● Push the memory card in until it clicks, and then slowly release it. ●● The memory card will pop up. 31 ç Contents Setting the Date and Time Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the [Date/Time] screen is displayed when you turn the camera on. Information you specify this way is recorded in image properties when you shoot, and it is used when you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date. You can also add a date stamp to shots, if you wish (= 69). 1 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the power button. ●● The [Date/Time] screen is displayed. 2 Set the date and time. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the date and time. ●● When finished, press the [ button. ] 32 ç Contents 3 Specify your home time zone. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose your home time zone. 4 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button when finished. After a confirmation message, the setting screen is no longer displayed. ●● To turn off the camera, press the power button. ●● Unless you set the date, time, and home time zone, the [Date/ Time] screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on. Specify the correct information. ●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] in step 2 and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. Changing the Date and Time Adjust the date and time as follows. 1 Access the menu screen. ●● Press the [ ] button. 33 ç Contents 2 Choose [Date/Time]. ●● Move the zoom lever to choose the [ ] tab. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Change the date and time. ●● Follow step 2 in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 31) to adjust the settings. ] button to ●● Press the [ close the menu screen. ●● Date/time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera’s built-in date/time battery (backup battery) after the battery pack is removed. ●● The date/time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 179), even if the camera is left off. ●● Once the date/time battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will be displayed when you turn the camera on. Set the correct date and time as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 31). 34 ç Contents Display Language Change the display language as needed. 1 Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ ] button. 2 Access the setting screen. ●● Press and hold the [ ] button, and then immediately press the [ ] button. 3 Set the display language. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the display language has been set, the setting screen is no longer displayed. ç Contents 35 ●● The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after ] button. pressing the [ ] button before you press the [ In this case, press the [ ] button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2. ●● You can also change the display language by pressing the ] button and choosing [Language ] on the [ ] tab. [ 36 ç Contents Trying the Camera Out Still Images Movies Follow these instructions to turn the camera on, shoot still images or movies, and then view them. Shooting (Smart Auto) For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. 1 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the power button. ●● The startup screen is displayed. 2 Enter [ ●● Press the [ times until [ ] mode. ] button several ] is displayed. ●● Aim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. ●● Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper right of the screen. ●● Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. 37 ç Contents 3 Compose the shot. ●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). 4 Shoot. Shooting Still Images 1) Focus. ●● Press the shutter button lightly, halfway down. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. ●● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the flash with your finger to prepare it for use. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. 38 ç Contents 2) Shoot. ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. ●● After displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. Shooting Movies 1) Start shooting. (1) ●● Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). ●● Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. ●● Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. ●● Once recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. 39 ç Contents 2) Finish shooting. ●● Press the movie button again to stop shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. Viewing After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. 1 Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Your last shot is displayed. 2 Browse through your images. ●● To view the previous image, press the [ ] button. To view the next image, press the [ ] button. 40 ç Contents ●● To access this screen (Scroll Display mode), press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons for at least one second. In this mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images. ●● To return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. ●● Movies are identified by a [ ] icon. To play movies, go to step 3. 3 Play movies. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● Playback now begins, and after ] is the movie is finished, [ displayed. ●● To adjust the volume, press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. 41 ç Contents Erasing Images You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. 1 Choose an image to erase. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. 2 Erase the image. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The current image is now erased. ●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can choose multiple images to erase at once (= 143). ç Contents Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your camera, including shooting and playback options 42 43 ç Contents On/Off Shooting Mode ●● Press the power button to turn the camera on and prepare for shooting. ●● To turn the camera off, press the power button again. Playback Mode ●● Press the [ ] button to turn the camera on and view your shots. ●● To turn the camera off, press the ] button again. [ ●● To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode, press the [ ] button. ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway (= 45). ●● The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback mode. You can turn the camera off when the lens is ] button. retracted by pressing the [ ç Contents 44 Power-Saving Features (Auto Power Down) As a way to conserve battery power, the camera automatically deactivates the screen (Display Off) and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity. Power Saving in Shooting Mode The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity. In about two more minutes, the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off. To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway (= 45). Power Saving in Playback Mode The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity. ●● You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off, if you prefer (= 168). ●● Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to a computer (= 188). 45 ç Contents Shutter Button To ensure your shots are in focus, always begin by holding the shutter button halfway down, and once the subject is in focus, press the button all the way down to shoot. In this manual, shutter button operations are described as pressing the button halfway or all the way down. 1 Press halfway. (Press lightly to focus.) ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice, and AF frames are displayed around image areas in focus. 2 Press all the way down. (From the halfway position, press fully to shoot.) ●● The camera shoots, as a shutter sound is played. ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. ●● Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the shutter button halfway. ●● Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot. It may take longer in some shooting scenes, and images will be blurry if you move the camera (or the subject moves) before the shutter sound ends. 46 ç Contents Shooting Display Options Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “On-Screen Information” (= 221). Information is displayed No information is displayed ●● Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view function when you are shooting under low light, making it easier to check how shots are composed. However, on-screen image brightness may not match the brightness of your shots. Note that any on-screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not affect recorded images. ●● For playback display options, see “Switching Display Modes” (= 127). 47 ç Contents Using the FUNC. Menu Configure commonly used functions through the FUNC. menu as follows. Note that menu items and options vary depending on the shooting mode (= 227) or playback mode (= 237). 1 Access the FUNC. menu. ●● Press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a menu item. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a menu item (1), and then press the [ ] or [ ] button. ●● Available options (2) are listed next to menu items, on the right. (1) (2) ●● Depending on the menu item, functions can be specified simply by pressing the [ ] or [ ] button, or another screen is displayed for configuring the function. 48 ç Contents 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. ] icon ●● Options labeled with a [ can be configured by pressing the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu items, press the [ ] button. 4 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● The screen before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1 is displayed again, showing the option you configured. ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 175). 49 ç Contents Using the Menu Screen Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as follows. Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs, such as shooting [ ], playback [ ], and so on. Note that available menu items vary depending on the selected shooting or playback mode (= 230 – = 237). 1 Access the menu screen. ●● Press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a tab. ●● Move the zoom lever to choose a tab. ●● After you have pressed the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a tab initially, you can switch between tabs by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. 50 ç Contents 3 Choose a menu item. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a menu item. ●● For menu items with options not shown, first press the [ ] or [ ] button to switch screens, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to select the menu item. ●● To return to the previous screen, ] button. press the [ 4 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. 5 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button to return to the screen displayed before you pressed the [ ] button in step 1. ●● To undo any accidental setting changes, you can restore the camera’s default settings (= 175). 51 ç Contents Indicator Display The indicator on the back of the camera (= 4) lights up or blinks depending on the camera status. Color Indicator Status Camera Status On Connected to a computer (= 188), or display off (= 44, = 167, = 168) Blinking Starting up, recording/reading/transmitting images, or shooting long exposures (= 95) Green ●● When the indicator blinks green, never turn the camera off, open the memory card/battery cover, or shake or jolt the camera, which may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card. 52 ç Contents Clock You can check the current time. ●● Press and hold the [ ] button. ●● The current time appears. ●● If you hold the camera vertically while using the clock function, it will switch to vertical display. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to change the display color. ●● Press the [ ] button again to cancel the clock display. ●● When the camera is off, press and hold the [ press the power button to display the clock. ] button, then ç Contents 2 53 Auto Mode Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting 54 ç Contents Shooting with CameraDetermined Settings For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes, simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions. Shooting (Smart Auto) Still Images Movies 1 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the power button. ●● The startup screen is displayed. 2 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Press the [ ] button several times until [ ] is displayed. ●● Aim the camera at the subject. The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene. ●● Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper right of the screen (= 60, = 62). ●● Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus. 55 ç Contents 3 Compose the shot. (1) ●● To zoom in and enlarge the subject, move the zoom lever toward [ ] (telephoto), and to zoom away from the subject, move it toward [ ] (wide angle). (A zoom bar (1) showing the zoom position is displayed.) ●● To zoom in or out quickly, move the zoom lever all the way toward [ ] (telephoto) or [ ] (wide angle), and to zoom in or out slowly, move it just a little in the desired direction. 4 Shoot. Shooting Still Images 1) Focus. ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The camera beeps twice after focusing, and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus. ●● Several AF frames are displayed when multiple areas are in focus. 56 ç Contents ●● If [Raise the flash] is displayed, lift the flash with your finger to prepare it for use. If you prefer not to use the flash, push it down with your finger, into the camera. 2) Shoot. ●● Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● As the camera shoots, a shutter sound is played, and in low-light conditions when you have raised the flash, it fires automatically. ●● Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends. ●● After displaying your shot, the camera will revert to the shooting screen. 57 ç Contents Shooting Movies 1) Start shooting. (1) ●● Press the movie button. The camera beeps once as recording begins, and [ Rec] is displayed with the elapsed time (1). ●● Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen, and the subject is slightly enlarged. The black bars indicate image areas not recorded. ●● Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus. ●● Once recording begins, take your finger off the movie button. 2) Resize the subject and recompose the shot as needed. ●● To resize the subject, repeat the operations in step 3. However, note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded. Note that movies shot at zoom factors shown in blue will look grainy. ●● When you recompose shots, the focus, brightness, and colors will be automatically adjusted. 58 ç Contents 3) Finish shooting. ●● Press the movie button again to stop shooting. The camera beeps twice as recording stops. ●● Recording will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. Still Images/Movies ●● If the camera is turned on while the [ ] button is held down, the camera will no longer sound. To activate sounds again, press ] button and choose [Mute] on the [ ] tab, and then the [ press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Off]. Still Images ●● A blinking [ ] icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred by camera shake. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. ●● If your shots are dark despite the flash firing, move closer to the subject. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 242). ●● The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you press the shutter button halfway. For details on the focusing range (shooting range), see “Shooting Range” (= 243). ●● To reduce red-eye and to assist in focusing, the lamp may be activated when shooting in low-light conditions. ●● A blinking [ ] icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished recharging. Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready, so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait, or release it and press it again. ●● Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed, your previous shot may determine the focus, brightness, and colors used. ç Contents 59 ●● You can change how long images are displayed after shots (= 81). Movies ●● Before shooting a movie, lower the flash with your finger. Be careful not to touch the microphone (1) when shooting a movie. Leaving the flash raised, or blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled. (1) ●● Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when shooting movies, because sounds made by the camera will be recorded. ●● Once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, adjust the image stabilization setting (= 121). ●● Audio recording is monaural. 60 ç Contents Scene Icons Still Images Movies In [ ] mode, shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by the icon displayed, and corresponding settings are automatically selected for optimal focusing, subject brightness, and color. When Shooting People Background People In Motion*1 Icon Shadows Background Color on Face*1 Bright Bright and Backlit – Gray With Blue Sky Blue Sky and Backlit – Light Blue Spotlights Dark Dark, Using Tripod Dark Blue * 2 – – 61 ç Contents When Shooting Other Subjects Background Other Subjects In Motion*1 Icon At Close Background Color Range Bright Gray Bright and Backlit With Blue Sky Light Blue Blue Sky and Backlit – Sunsets Orange Spotlights Dark Dark, Using Tripod Dark Blue * 2 – – *1 Not displayed for movies. *2 Displayed in dark scenes when the camera is held still, as when mounted on a tripod. ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 97) if the scene icon does not match actual shooting conditions, or if it is not possible to shoot with your expected effect, color, or brightness. 62 ç Contents Image Stabilization Icons Still Images Movies Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS). Additionally, the following icons are displayed in [ ] mode. Image stabilization for still images (Normal) Image stabilization for still images when panning (Panning)* Image stabilization for macro shots. During movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization for macro movie recording is used (Hybrid IS). Image stabilization for movies, reducing strong camera shake, as when shooting while walking (Dynamic) Image stabilization for slow camera shake, such as when shooting movies at telephoto (Powered) No image stabilization, because the camera is mounted on a tripod or held still by other means. However, during movie recording, [ ] is displayed, and image stabilization to counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used (Tripod IS). * Displayed when you pan, following moving subjects with the camera. When you follow subjects moving horizontally, image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera shake, and horizontal stabilization stops. Similarly, when you follow subjects moving vertically, image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake. ●● To cancel image stabilization, set [IS Mode] to [Off] (= 121). In this case, an IS icon is not displayed. 63 ç Contents On-Screen Frames Still Images Movies A variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are aiming the camera at. ●● A white frame is displayed around the subject (or person’s face) determined by the camera to be the main subject, and gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus. However, if the camera detects subject movement, only the white frame will remain on the screen. ●● When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects subject movement, a blue frame is displayed, and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted (Servo AF). ●● Try shooting in [ ] mode (= 97) if no frames are displayed, if frames are not displayed around desired subjects, or if frames are displayed on the background or similar areas. 64 ç Contents Common, Convenient Features Still Images Movies Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom) When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom, use digital zoom for up to about 160x enlargement. 1 Move the zoom lever toward [ ]. ●● Hold the lever until zooming stops. ●● Zooming stops at the largest possible zoom factor (before the image becomes noticeably grainy), which is then indicated on the screen. (1) 2 Move the zoom lever toward [ ] again. ●● The camera zooms in even closer on the subject. ●● (1) is the current zoom factor. 65 ç Contents ●● Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar (which indicates the zoom position). The color of the zoom bar will change depending on the zoom range. -- White range: optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy. -- Yellow range: digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably grainy (ZoomPlus). -- Blue range: digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy. ●● Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution settings (= 73), the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by following step 1. ●● To deactivate digital zoom, choose MENU (= 49) ► [ ► [Digital Zoom] ► [Off]. ] tab 66 ç Contents Using the Self-Timer Still Images Movies With the self-timer, you can include yourself in group photos or other timed shots. The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed. ] 2 Shoot. ●● For Still Images: Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject, and then press it all the way down. ●● For Movies: Press the movie button. 67 ç Contents ●● Once you start the self-timer, the lamp will blink and the camera will play a self-timer sound. ●● Two seconds before the shot, the blinking and sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the ] button. [ ●● To restore the original setting, choose [ ] in step 1. Using the Self-Timer to Avoid Camera Shake Still Images Movies This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have pressed the shutter button. If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button, it will not affect your shot. ●● Follow step 1 in “Using the SelfTimer” (= 66) and choose [ ]. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. ●● Follow step 2 in “Using the SelfTimer” (= 66) to shoot. 68 ç Contents Customizing the Self-Timer Still Images Movies You can specify the delay (0 – 30 seconds) and number of shots (1 – 10). 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Following step 1 in “Using the Self-Timer” (= 66), choose [ ] and press the [ ] button immediately. 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Delay] or [Shots]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a value, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed. ●● Follow step 2 in “Using the SelfTimer” (= 66) to shoot. ●● For movies shot using the self-timer, [Delay] represents the delay before recording begins, but the [Shots] setting has no effect. ] 69 ç Contents ●● When you specify multiple shots, image brightness and white balance are determined by the first shot. More time is required between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots. Shooting will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full. ●● When a delay longer than two seconds is specified, two seconds before the shot, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires.) Adding a Date Stamp Still Images Movies The camera can add the shooting date to images, in the lowerright corner. However, note that date stamps cannot be edited or removed, so confirm beforehand that the date and time are correct (= 31). 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Date Stamp ] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 49). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed. ] 70 ç Contents 2 Shoot. ●● As you take shots, the camera adds the shooting date or time to the lower-right corner of images. ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. ●● Date stamps cannot be edited or removed. ●● Shots taken without adding a date stamp can be printed with one as follows. However, adding a date stamp this way to images that already have one may cause it to be printed twice. -- Print using printer functions (= 191) -- Use camera DPOF print settings (= 200) to print 71 ç Contents Continuous Shooting Still Images Movies Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. For details on the continuous shooting speed, see “Continuous Shooting Speed” (= 243). 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ in the menu, and then choose [ ] (= 47). ] ●● Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed. ] 2 Shoot. ●● Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously. ●● During continuous shooting, focus and exposure are locked at the position/level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway. ●● Cannot be used with the self-timer (= 66). ●● Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions, camera settings, and the zoom position. ●● As more shots are taken, shooting may slow down. ●● Shooting may slow down if the flash fires. 72 ç Contents Image Customization Features Changing the Aspect Ratio Still Images Movies Change the image aspect ratio (ratio of width to height) as follows. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● Once the setting is complete, the screen aspect ratio will be updated. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Same aspect ratio as widescreen HDTVs. Same aspect ratio as 35mm film, used for printing images at 5 x 7-inch or postcard sizes. Native aspect ratio of the camera screen, also used for display on standard-definition televisions or similar display devices, or for printing images at 3.5 x 5-inch or A-series sizes. Square aspect ratio. 73 ç Contents Changing Image Resolution (Size) Still Images Movies Choose from 4 levels of image resolution, as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 241). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size (for 4:3 Images) A2 (16.5 x 23.4 in.) A3 – A5 (11.7 x 16.5 – 5.8 x 8.3 in.) 3.5 x 5 in., 5 x 7 in., Postcard For e-mailing and similar purposes 74 ç Contents Changing Movie Image Quality Still Images Movies 2 image quality settings are available. For guidelines on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory card, see “Recording Time per Memory Card” (= 242). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [ ]. Image Quality Resolution Frame Rate Details 1280 x 720 25 fps For shooting in HD 640 x 480 30 fps For shooting in standard definition ●● In [ ] mode, black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded. 75 ç Contents Helpful Shooting Features Displaying Grid Lines Still Images Movies Grid lines can be displayed on the screen for vertical and horizontal reference while shooting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Grid Lines] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 49). ●● Once the setting is complete, grid lines are displayed on the screen. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. ●● Grid lines are not recorded in your shots. 76 ç Contents Magnifying the Area in Focus Still Images Movies You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway, which will enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 49). 2 Check the focus. ●● Press the shutter button halfway. The face detected as the main subject is now magnified. ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. 77 ç Contents ●● The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the shutter button is pressed halfway. -- If a face was not detected, if the person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the screen, or if the camera detects subject movement -- When digital zoom is used (= 64) -- When Tracking AF is used (= 112) -- When a TV is used as a display (= 182) Checking for Closed Eyes Still Images Movies [ ] is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their eyes. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Blink Detection] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 49). 78 ç Contents 2 Shoot. ●● [ ] flashes when the camera detects a person whose eyes are closed. ●● To restore the original setting, choose [Off] in step 1. ●● When you have specified multiple shots in [ ] mode, this function is only available for the final shot. ●● A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have selected [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] in [Display Time] (= 81). ●● This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode (= 71). 79 ç Contents Customizing Camera Operation Customize shooting functions on the [ ] tab of the menu screen as follows. For instructions on menu functions, see “Using the Menu Screen” (= 49). Deactivating the AF-Assist Beam Still Images Movies You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low-light conditions. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF-assist Beam] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 49). ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. 80 ç Contents Deactivating the Red-Eye Reduction Lamp Still Images Movies You can deactivate the red-eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red-eye when the flash is used in low-light shots. 1 Access the [Flash Settings] screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Flash Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 49). 2 Configure the setting. ●● Choose [Off] for [Red-Eye Lamp] (= 49). ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [On]. 81 ç Contents Changing the Image Display Style after Shots Still Images Movies You can change how long images are displayed and what information is displayed immediately after shooting. Changing the Image Display Period after Shots 1 Access the [Review image after shooting] screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Review image after shooting] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 49). 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Display Time]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Quick]. Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again. Displays images for the specified time. Even 2 sec., while the shot is displayed, you can take another 4 sec., 8 sec. shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again. Hold Displays images until you press the shutter button halfway. Off No image display after shots. 82 ç Contents Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows. 1 Set [Display Time] to [2 sec.], [4 sec.], [8 sec.], or [Hold] (= 81). 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Display Info]. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the desired option. ●● To restore the original setting, repeat this process but choose [Off]. Off Displays only the image. Detailed Displays shooting details (= 223). ●● When [Display Time] (= 81) is set to [Off] or [Quick], [Display Info] is set to [Off] and cannot be changed. ] button while an image is displayed after ●● By pressing the [ shooting, you can switch the display information. Note that the settings of [Display Info] are not changed. You can also erase images by pressing the [ ] button, or protect (= 137) or tag images as favorites (= 150) by pressing the [ ] button. ç Contents 3 83 Other Shooting Modes Shoot more effectively in various scenes, and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured using special functions 84 ç Contents Brightness / Color Customization (Live View Control) Still Images Movies Image brightness or colors when shooting can be easily customized as follows. 1 Enter [ ●● Press the [ times until [ ] mode. ] button several ] is displayed. 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button to access the setting screen. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a setting item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the value as you watch the screen. ●● Press the [ ] button. 3 Shoot. Brightness For brighter images, adjust the level to the right, and for darker images, adjust it to the left. Color For more vivid images, adjust the level to the right, and for more subdued images, adjust it to the left. Tone For a warm, reddish tone, adjust the level to the right, and for a cool, bluish tone, adjust it to the left. 85 ç Contents Specific Scenes Choose a mode matching the shooting scene, and the camera will automatically configure the settings for optimal shots. 1 Choose a shooting mode. ●● Press the [ times until [ ] button several ] is displayed. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). 2 Shoot. Shooting Portraits (Portrait) Still Images Movies ●● Take shots of people with a softening effect. Shooting under Low Light (Low Light) Still Images Movies ●● Shoot with minimal camera and subject shake even in low-light conditions. 86 ç Contents Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds (Snow) Still Images Movies ●● Bright, natural-colored shots of people against snowy backgrounds. Shooting Fireworks (Fireworks) Still Images Movies ●● Vivid shots of fireworks. ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 121). ●● [ ] mode resolution is [ ] (2304 x 1728) and cannot be changed. ●● In [ ] mode, although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter button halfway, optimal focus is still determined. 87 ç Contents Applying Special Effects Add a variety of effects to images when shooting. 1 Choose a shooting mode. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) to choose a shooting mode. 2 Shoot. Shooting in Vivid Colors (Super Vivid) Still Images Movies ●● Shots in rich, vivid colors. Posterized Shots (Poster Effect) Still Images Movies ●● Shots that resemble an old poster or illustration. ●● In [ ] and [ ] modes, try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 88 ç Contents Shooting with a Fish-Eye Lens Effect (Fish-Eye Effect) Still Images Movies Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish-eye lens. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose an effect level. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an effect level, and then press the [ ] button again. ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 89 ç Contents Shots Resembling Miniature Models (Miniature Effect) Still Images Movies Creates the effect of a miniature model, by blurring image areas above and below your selected area. You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded. People and objects in the scene will move quickly during playback. Note that sound is not recorded. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) and choose [ ]. ●● A white frame is displayed, indicating the image area that will not be blurred. 2 Choose the area to keep in focus. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Move the zoom lever to resize the frame, and press the [ ][ ] buttons to move it. 3 For movies, choose the movie playback speed. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the speed. 90 ç Contents 4 Return to the shooting screen and shoot. ●● Press the [ ] button to return to the shooting screen, and then shoot. Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time (for One-Minute Clips) Speed Playback Time Approx. 12 sec. Approx. 6 sec. Approx. 3 sec. ●● The zoom is not available when shooting movies. Be sure to set the zoom before shooting. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. ●● To switch the orientation of the frame (from horizontal to vertical or vice-versa), press the [ ] button in step 2. You can move the frame in vertical orientation by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame. ] and [ ] at ●● Movie image quality is [ ] at an aspect ratio of [ ] (= 72). These quality settings cannot an aspect ratio of [ be changed. 91 ç Contents Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect (Toy Camera Effect) Still Images Movies This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting (darker, blurred image corners) and changing the overall color. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose a color tone. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a color tone, and then press the [ ] button again. ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. Standard Shots resemble toy camera images. Warm Images have a warmer tone than with [Standard]. Cool Images have a cooler tone than with [Standard]. ●● Try taking some test shots first, to make sure you obtain the desired results. 92 ç Contents Shooting in Monochrome Still Images Movies Shoot images in black and white, sepia, or blue and white. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose a color tone. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a color tone, and then press the [ ] button again. ●● A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied. 3 Shoot. B/W Black and white shots. Sepia Sepia tone shots. Blue Blue and white shots. 93 ç Contents Special Modes for Other Purposes Using the Face Self-Timer Still Images Movies The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of another person (such as the photographer) has entered the shooting area (= 111). This is useful when including yourself in group photos or similar shots. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) and choose [ ]. 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway. ●● Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face you focus on and white frames around other faces. 3 Press the shutter button all the way down. ●● The camera now enters shooting standby mode, and [Look straight at camera to start count down] is displayed. ●● The lamp blinks and the self-timer sound is played. 94 ç Contents 4 Join the subjects in the shooting area and look at the camera. ●● After the camera detects a new face, the lamp blinking and self-timer sound will speed up. (When the flash fires, the lamp will remain lit.) About two seconds later, the camera will shoot. ●● To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self-timer, press the ] button. [ ●● Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area, the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later. ●● To change the number of shots, after choosing [ ] in step 1, ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the press the [ ] button again. [Blink number of shots, and then press the [ Detection] (= 77) is only available for the final shot. 95 ç Contents Shooting Long Exposures (Long Shutter) Still Images Movies Specify a shutter speed of 1 – 15 seconds to shoot long exposures. In this case, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to prevent camera shake. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) and choose [ ]. 2 Choose the shutter speed. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the shutter speed, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Check the exposure. ●● Press the shutter button halfway to view the exposure for your selected shutter speed. 4 Shoot. ç Contents 96 ●● On-screen image brightness in step 3, when you pressed the shutter button halfway, may not match the brightness of your shots. ●● With shutter speeds of 1.3 seconds or slower, there will be a delay before you can shoot again, as the camera processes images to reduce noise. ●● Set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 121). ●● If the flash fires, your shot may be overexposed. In this case, set the flash to [ ] and shoot again (= 117). ç Contents 97 4 P Mode More discerning shots, in your preferred shooting style ●● Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera when set to [ ] mode. ●● [ ]: Program AE; AE: Auto Exposure ●● Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than [ ], make sure the function is available in that mode (= 225). 98 ç Contents Shooting in Program AE ([P] Mode) Still Images Movies You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting style. 1 Enter [ ] mode. ●● Follow step 1 in “Specific Scenes” (= 85) and choose [ ]. 2 Customize the settings as desired (= 99 – = 121), and then shoot. ●● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the shutter button halfway, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. In this case, try adjusting the ISO speed (= 102) or activating the flash (if subjects are dark, = 117), which may enable adequate exposure. ●● Movies can be recorded in [ ] mode as well, by pressing the movie button. However, some FUNC. (= 47) and MENU (= 49) settings may be automatically adjusted for movie recording. 99 ç Contents Image Brightness (Exposure) Adjusting Image Brightness (Exposure Compensation) Still Images Movies The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1/3stop increments, in a range of –2 to +2. ●● Press the [ ] button. As you watch the screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust brightness. ●● When shooting movies, shoot with the exposure compensation bar displayed. ●● When shooting still images, press the [ ] button to display the set exposure compensation amount, and then shoot. ●● You can also shoot still images with exposure compensation bar displayed. ] is displayed, and the exposure is ●● While recording a movie, [ locked. 100 ç Contents Locking Image Brightness / Exposure (AE Lock) Still Images Movies Before shooting, you can lock the exposure, or you can specify focus and exposure separately. 1 Lock the exposure. ●● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked. With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. ●● [ ] is displayed, and the exposure is locked. ●● To unlock AE, release the shutter button and press the [ ] button again. In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed. 2 Compose the shot and shoot. ●● AE: Auto Exposure 101 ç Contents Changing the Metering Method Still Images Movies Adjust the metering method (how brightness is measured) to suit shooting conditions as follows. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Evaluative For typical shooting conditions, including backlit shots. Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions. Center Weighted Avg. Determines the average brightness of light across the entire image area, calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more important. Spot Metering restricted to within the [ ] (Spot AE Point frame), displayed in the center of the screen. 102 ç Contents Changing the ISO Speed Still Images Movies ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. AUTO Automatically adjusts the ISO speed to suit the shooting mode and conditions. 100, 200 Low For shooting outdoors in fair weather. 400, 800 Slightly Low For shooting in cloudy conditions, or at twilight. 1600 Slightly High For shooting night scenes, or in dark rooms. ●● To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have set the ISO speed to [AUTO], press the shutter button halfway. ●● Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess, there may be a greater risk of subject and camera shake in some shooting conditions. ●● Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed, which may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash range. However, shots may look grainy. 103 ç Contents Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Still Images Movies Before shooting, excessively bright or dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast can also be automatically corrected before shooting to make subjects stand out better. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Auto] (= 49). ●● Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed. ●● Under some shooting conditions, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. ●● You can also correct existing images (= 157). ] 104 ç Contents Image Colors Adjusting White Balance Still Images Movies By adjusting white balance (WB), you can make image colors look more natural for the scene you are shooting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. Auto Automatically sets the optimal white balance for the shooting conditions. Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather. Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weather or at twilight. Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting. Fluorescent For shooting under white fluorescent lighting. Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting. Custom For manually setting a custom white balance (= 105). 105 ç Contents Custom White Balance Still Images Movies For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot, adjust white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting. Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot. ●● Follow the steps in “Adjusting White Balance” (= 104) to choose [ ]. ●● Aim the camera at a plain white subject, so that the entire screen is white. Press the [ ] button. ●● The tint of the screen changes once the white balance data has been recorded. ●● Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after recording white balance data. Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images Movies Change image color tones as desired, such as converting images to sepia or black and white. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● The option you configured is now displayed. 106 ç Contents My Colors Off – Vivid Emphasizes contrast and color saturation, making images sharper. Neutral Tones down contrast and color saturation for subdued images. Sepia Creates sepia tone images. B/W Creates black and white images. Positive Film Combines the effects of Vivid Blue, Vivid Green, and Vivid Red to produce intense yet natural-looking colors resembling images on positive film. Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones. Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones. Vivid Blue Emphasizes blues in images. Makes the sky, ocean, and other blue subjects more vivid. Vivid Green Emphasizes greens in images. Makes mountains, foliage, and other green subjects more vivid. Vivid Red Emphasizes reds in images. Makes red subjects more vivid. Custom Color Adjust contrast, sharpness, color saturation, and other qualities as desired (= 107). 107 ç Contents ●● White balance (= 104) cannot be set in [ ] or [ ] modes. ●● With [ ] and [ ] modes, colors other than people’s skin tone may change. These settings may not produce the expected results with some skin tones. Custom Color Still Images Movies Choose the desired level of image contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tones in a range of 1 – 5. 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 105) to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then specify the value by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● For stronger/more intense effects (or darker skin tones), adjust the value to the right, and for weaker/ lighter effects (or lighter skin tones), adjust the value to the left. ] button to ●● Press the [ complete the setting. 108 ç Contents Shooting Range and Focusing Shooting Close-Ups (Macro) Still Images Movies To restrict the focus to subjects at close range, set the camera to [ ]. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 243). ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ ] is displayed. ●● If the flash fires, vignetting may occur. ●● Be careful to avoid damaging the lens. ●● In the yellow bar display area below the zoom bar, [ gray and the camera will not focus. ] will turn ●● To prevent camera shake, try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting with the camera set to [ ] (= 67). 109 ç Contents Shooting Distant Subjects (Infinity) Still Images Movies To restrict the focus to distant subjects, set the camera to [ ]. For details on the focusing range, see “Shooting Range” (= 243). ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Once the setting is complete, [ is displayed. ] Digital Tele-Converter Still Images Movies The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1.6x or 2.0x. This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster than it would be if you zoomed (including using digital zoom) in to the same zoom factor. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Digital Zoom] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 49). ●● The view is enlarged and the zoom factor is displayed on the screen. 110 ç Contents ●● The digital tele-converter cannot be used with digital zoom (= 64) or AF-point zoom (= 76). ●● The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom ] for maximum telephoto, and when lever all the way toward [ you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 in “Zooming In Closer on Subjects (Digital Zoom)” (= 64). Changing the AF Frame Mode Still Images Movies Change the AF (auto focus) frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as follows. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [AF Frame] on the [ ] tab, and then choose the desired option (= 49). Center Still Images Movies One AF frame is displayed in the center. Effective for reliable focusing. ●● A yellow AF frame is displayed with [ ] if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. 111 ç Contents ●● To reduce the AF frame size, press the [ ] button and set [AF Frame Size] on the [ ] tab to [Small] (= 49). ●● The AF frame size is set to [Normal] when you use the digital zoom (= 64) or digital tele-converter (= 109). ●● To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or in a corner, first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame, and then hold the shutter button halfway down. As you continue to hold the shutter button halfway, recompose the shot as desired, and then press the shutter button all the way down (Focus Lock). ●● The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter button halfway and [AF-Point Zoom] (= 76) is set to [On]. Face AiAF Still Images Movies ●● Detects people’s faces, and then sets the focus, exposure (evaluative metering only), and white balance ([ ] only). ●● After you aim the camera at the subject, a white frame is displayed around the person’s face determined by the camera to be the main subject, and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected faces. ●● When the camera detects movement, frames will follow moving subjects, within a certain range. ●● After you press the shutter button halfway, up to nine green frames are displayed around faces in focus. 112 ç Contents ●● If faces are not detected, or when only gray frames are displayed (without a white frame), up to nine green frames are displayed in the areas in focus when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● If faces are not detected when Servo AF (= 114) is set to [On], the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Examples of faces that cannot be detected: -- Subjects that are distant or extremely close -- Subjects that are dark or light -- Faces in profile, at an angle, or partly hidden ●● The camera may misinterpret non-human subjects as faces. ●● No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway. Choosing Subjects to Focus On (Tracking AF) Still Images Movies Shoot after choosing a subject to focus on as follows. 1 Choose [Tracking AF]. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing the AF Frame Mode” (= 110) to choose [Tracking AF]. ●● [ ] is displayed in the center of the screen. 113 ç Contents 2 Choose a subject to focus on. ●● Aim the camera so that [ ] is on the desired subject, and then press the [ ] button. ●● When the subject is detected, the camera beeps and [ ] is displayed. Even if the subject moves, the camera will continue to track the subject within a certain range. ●● If no subject is detected, [ displayed. ] is ●● To cancel tracking, press the [ ] button again. 3 Shoot. ●● Press the shutter button halfway. [ ] changes to a blue [ ], which follows the subject as the camera continues to adjust the focus and exposure (Servo AF) (= 114). ●● Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot. ●● Even after your shot, [ ] is still displayed and the camera continues to track the subject. 114 ç Contents ●● [Servo AF] (= 114) is set to [On] and cannot be changed. ●● Tracking may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly, or when subject color or brightness matches that of the background too closely. ●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab (= 49) is not available. ●● [ ] and [ ] are not available. ●● The camera can detect subjects even if you press the shutter button halfway without pressing the [ ] button. After your shot, [ ] is displayed in the center of the screen. Shooting with Servo AF Still Images Movies This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion, because the camera continues to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as you press the shutter button halfway. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Servo AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [On] (= 49). 2 Focus. ●● The focus and exposure are maintained where the blue AF frame is displayed while you are pressing the shutter button halfway. 115 ç Contents ●● Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions. ●● In low-light conditions, Servo AF may not be activated (AF frames may not turn blue) when you press the shutter button halfway. In this case, the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF frame mode. ●● If adequate exposure cannot be obtained, shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange. Release the shutter button, and then press it halfway again. ●● AF lock shooting is not available. ●● [AF-Point Zoom] on the [ ] tab (= 49) is not available. ●● Not available when using the self-timer (= 66). Changing the Focus Setting Still Images Movies You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects it is aimed at, even when the shutter button is not pressed. Instead, you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Continuous AF] on the [ ] tab, and then choose [Off] (= 49). 116 ç Contents On Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities, because the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway. Off Conserves battery power, because the camera does not focus constantly. Shooting with the AF Lock Still Images Movies The focus can be locked. After you lock the focus, the focal position will not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button. 1 Lock the focus. ●● With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. ●● The focus is now locked, and [ is displayed. ] ●● To unlock the focus, release the shutter button and press the [ ] button again. In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed. 2 Compose the shot and shoot. 117 ç Contents Flash Changing the Flash Mode Still Images Movies You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene. For details on the flash range, see “Flash Range” (= 242). 1 Lift the flash. 2 Configure the setting. ●● Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a flash mode, and then press the [ ] button. ●● The option you configured is now displayed. ●● The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the [ ] button when the flash is lowered. Lift the flash with your finger in advance. Auto Fires automatically in low-light conditions. ç Contents 118 On Fires for each shot. Slow Synchro Fires to illuminate the main subject (such as people) while shooting at a slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range. ●● In [ ] mode, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 121). ●● In [ ] mode, even after the flash fires, ensure that the main subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing. Off For shooting without the flash. ●● If a blinking [ ] icon is displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in camera-shake inducing, low-light conditions, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. 119 ç Contents Shooting with the FE Lock Still Images Movies Just as with the AE lock (= 100), you can lock the exposure for the flash shots. 1 Lift the flash and set the flash to [ ] (= 117). 2 Lock the flash exposure. ●● Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked. With the shutter button pressed halfway, press the [ ] button. ●● The flash fires, and when [ ] is displayed, the flash output level is retained. ●● To unlock FE, release the shutter button and press the [ ] button again. In this case, [ ] is no longer displayed. 3 Compose the shot and shoot. ●● FE: Flash Exposure 120 ç Contents Other Settings Changing the Compression Ratio (Image Quality) Still Images Movies Choose from two compression ratios, [ ] (Super Fine) and [ ] (Fine), as follows. For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory card, see “Number of Shots per Memory Card” (= 241). ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). 121 ç Contents Changing the IS Mode Settings Still Images Movies 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [IS Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button (= 49). 2 Configure the setting. ●● Choose [IS Mode], and then choose the desired option (= 49). Continuous Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied (Intelligent IS) (= 62). Shoot Only* Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting. Off Deactivates image stabilization. * The setting is changed to [Continuous] for movie recording. ●● If image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake, mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still. In this case, set [IS Mode] to [Off]. 122 ç Contents Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting Still Images Movies Normally, once movie recording begins, the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake. To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting, you can choose not to reduce significant camera shake. ●● Follow the steps in “Changing the IS Mode Settings” (= 121) to access the [IS Settings] screen. ●● Choose [Dynamic IS], and then choose [2] (= 49). ●● When movie image quality is set to [ ] (= 74), the [Dynamic IS] setting is [1] and cannot be changed. ●● You can also set [IS Mode] to [Off], so that subjects are recorded at the same size shown before shooting. ç Contents 123 5 Playback Mode Have fun reviewing your shots, and browse or edit them in many ways ●● To prepare the camera for these operations, press the ] button to enter Playback mode. [ ●● It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images from other cameras. 124 ç Contents Viewing Still Images Movies After shooting images or movies, you can view them on the screen as follows. 1 Enter Playback mode. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Your last shot is displayed. 2 Browse through your images. ●● To view the previous image, press the [ ] button. To view the next image, press the [ ] button. 125 ç Contents ●● To access this screen (Scroll Display mode), press and hold the [ ][ ] buttons for at least one second. In this mode, press the [ ][ ] buttons to browse through images. ●● To return to single-image display, press the [ ] button. ●● To browse images grouped by shooting date, press the [ ][ ] buttons in Scroll Display mode. ●● Movies are identified by a [ ] icon. To play movies, go to step 3. 3 Play movies. ●● To start playback, press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button again. 126 ç Contents 4 Adjust the volume. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the volume. (1) ●● To adjust the volume when the volume indicator (1) is no longer displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. 5 Pause playback. ●● To pause or resume playback, press the [ ] button. ●● After the movie is finished, ] is displayed. [ ●● To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode, press the shutter button halfway. ] tab ●● To deactivate Scroll Display, choose MENU (= 49) ► [ ► [Scroll Display] ► [Off]. ●● To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback ] tab ► [Resume] ► mode, choose MENU (= 49) ► [ [Last shot]. ●● To change the transition shown between images, access MENU ] tab ► (= 49) and choose your desired effect on the [ [Transition]. 127 ç Contents Switching Display Modes Still Images Movies Press the [ ] button to view other information on the screen, or to hide the information. For details on the information displayed, see “Playback (Detailed Information Display)” (= 223). No Information Display Simple Information Display Detailed Information Display 128 ç Contents Overexposure Warning (for Image Highlights) Still Images Movies Washed-out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display (= 127). Histogram Still Images Movies ●● The graph in detailed information display (= 127) is a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image. The horizontal axis represents the degree of brightness, and the vertical axis, how much of the image is at each level of brightness. Viewing the histogram is a way to check exposure. 129 ç Contents Browsing and Filtering Images Navigating through Images in an Index Still Images Movies By displaying multiple images in an index, you can quickly find the images you are looking for. 1 Display images in an index. ●● Move the zoom lever toward [ ] to display images in an index. Moving the lever again will increase the number of images shown. ●● To display fewer images, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. Fewer images are shown each time you move the lever. 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. ●● An orange frame is displayed around the selected image. ●● Press the [ ] button to view the selected image in single-image display. 130 ç Contents Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions Still Images Movies Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering image display according to your specified conditions. You can also protect (= 137) or delete (= 142) these images all at once. People Displays images with detected faces. Date Displays the images shot on a specific date. Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites (= 150). Still image/Movie Displays only still images or movies. 1 Choose a search condition. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose a condition (= 47). ●● When you have selected [ ] or [ ], choose the condition by pressing the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons on the screen displayed, and then press the [ ] button. 2 View the filtered images. ●● Images matching your conditions are displayed in yellow frames. To view only these images, press the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● To cancel filtered display, choose [ ] in step 1. ç Contents 131 ●● When the camera has found no corresponding images for some conditions, those conditions will not be available. ●● To show or hide information, press the [ ] button in step 2. ●● Options for viewing the images found (in step 2) include “Navigating through Images in an Index” (= 129), “Magnifying Images” (= 132), and “Viewing Slideshows” (= 133). You can also apply image operations to all images found, by choosing [Protect All Images in Search] in “Protecting Images” (= 137) or [Select All Images in Search] in “Erasing Multiple Images at Once” (= 143), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 200), or “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 205). ●● If you edit images and save them as new images (= 152 – = 160), a message is displayed, and the images that were found are no longer shown. 132 ç Contents Image Viewing Options Magnifying Images Still Images Movies 1 Magnify an image. ●● Moving the zoom lever toward [ ] will zoom in and magnify the image, and [ ] is displayed. You can magnify images up to about 10x by continuing to hold the zoom lever. ●● The approximate position of the displayed area (1) is shown for reference. (1) ●● To zoom out, move the zoom lever toward [ ]. You can return to single-image display by continuing to hold it. 133 ç Contents 2 Move the display position and switch images as needed. ●● To move the display position, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. ] is displayed, you ●● While [ can switch to [ ] by pressing the [ ] button. To switch to other images while zoomed, press the [ ][ ] buttons. Press the [ ] button again to restore the original setting. ●● You can return to single-image display from magnified display by ] button. pressing the [ Viewing Slideshows Still Images Movies Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows. Each image is displayed for about three seconds. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ] in the menu, and choose the desired option (= 47). ●● The slideshow will start after [Loading image] is displayed for a few seconds. ●● Press the [ the slideshow. ] button to stop 134 ç Contents ●● The camera’s power-saving functions (= 44) are deactivated during slideshows. ●● To pause or resume slideshows, press the [ ] button. ●● You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. For fast-forward or fast-rewind, hold the [ ][ ] buttons down. ●● In filtered display (= 130), only images matching search conditions are played. Changing Slideshow Settings You can set up slideshows to repeat, and you can change the transitions between images and the display duration of each image. 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Slideshow] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 2 Configure the settings. ●● Choose a menu item to configure, and then choose the desired option (= 49). ●● To start the slideshow with your settings, choose [Start] and press the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu screen, ] button. press the [ 135 ç Contents ●● [Play Time] cannot be modified when [Bubble] is chosen in [Effect]. Auto Playback of Related Images (Smart Shuffle) Still Images Movies Based on the current image, the camera offers four images that you may wish to view. After you choose to view one of those images, the camera offers four more images. This is an enjoyable way to play back images in an unexpected order. Try this feature after you have taken many shots, in many kinds of scenes. 1 Choose Smart Shuffle. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 47). ●● Four candidate images are displayed. 136 ç Contents 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose the image you want to view next. ●● Your chosen image is displayed in the center, surrounded by the next four candidate images. ●● For full-screen display of the center image, press the [ ] button. To restore the original display, press the [ ] button again. ●● Press the [ ] button to restore single-image display. ●● Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases: -- There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera -- An unsupported image is currently displayed -- Images are shown in filtered display (= 130) 137 ç Contents Protecting Images Still Images Movies Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera (= 142). ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 47). [Protected] is displayed. ●● To cancel protection, repeat this ] again, process and choose [ and then press the [ ] button. ●● Protected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the card (= 170, = 171). ●● Protected images cannot be erased using the camera’s erasure function. To erase them this way, first cancel protection. 138 ç Contents Using the Menu 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button and ] tab choose [Protect] on the [ (= 49). 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Choose a menu item and an option as desired (= 49). ●● To return to the menu screen, ] button. press the [ Choosing Images Individually 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 138), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. 139 ç Contents 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● To cancel selection, press the [ button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ] ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. 3 Protect the image. ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. Selecting a Range 1 Choose [Select Range]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 138), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. 140 ç Contents 2 Choose a starting image. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an ending image. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Last image], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images before the first image cannot be selected as the last image. 141 ç Contents 4 Protect the images. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Protect], and then press the [ ] button. ●● To cancel protection for groups of images, choose [Unlock] in step 4. Protecting All Images at Once 1 Choose [Protect All Images]. ●● Following step 2 in “Using the Menu” (= 138), choose [Protect All Images] and press the [ ] button. 2 Protect the images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Clearing All Protection at Once You can clear protection from all images at once. To clear protection, choose [Unprotect All Images] in step 1 of “Protecting All Images at Once”, and then complete step 2. 142 ç Contents Erasing Images Still Images Movies You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 137) cannot be erased. 1 Choose an image to erase. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. 2 Erase the image. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● After [Erase?] is displayed, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The current image is now erased. ●● To cancel erasure, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], and then press the [ ] button. 143 ç Contents Erasing Multiple Images at Once You can choose multiple images to erase at once. Be careful when erasing images, because they cannot be recovered. However, protected images (= 137) cannot be erased. Choosing a Selection Method 1 Access the setting screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Erase] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 2 Choose a selection method. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose a selection method, and then press the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu screen, ] button. press the [ 144 ç Contents Choosing Images Individually 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 143), choose [Select] and press the [ button. ] 2 Choose an image. ●● Once you choose an image following step 2 in “Choosing Images Individually” (= 138), [ ] is displayed. ●● To cancel selection, press the [ button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. 3 Erase the image. ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ] 145 ç Contents Selecting a Range 1 Choose [Select Range]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 143), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose images. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 139) to specify images. 3 Erase the images. ●● Press the [ ] button to choose [Erase], and then press the [ ] button. 146 ç Contents Specifying All Images at Once 1 Choose [Select All Images]. ●● Following step 2 in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 143), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. 2 Erase the images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 147 ç Contents Rotating Images Still Images Movies Change the orientation of images and save them as follows. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 47). 2 Rotate the image. ●● Press the [ ] or [ ] button, depending on the desired direction. Each time you press the button, the image is rotated 90°. Press the [ ] button to complete the setting. 148 ç Contents Using the Menu 1 Choose [Rotate]. ●● Press the [ ] button and ] tab choose [Rotate] on the [ (= 49). 2 Rotate the image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. ●● The image is rotated 90° each time you press the [ ] button. ●● To return to the menu screen, ] button. press the [ ●● Rotation is not possible when [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off] (= 149). 149 ç Contents Deactivating Auto Rotation Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation, which rotates images based on the current camera orientation. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Auto Rotate] on the ] tab, and then choose [Off] [ (= 49). ●● Images cannot be rotated (= 147) when you set [Auto Rotate] to [Off]. Additionally, images already rotated will be displayed in the original orientation. ●● In Smart Shuffle (= 135) mode, even if [Auto Rotate] is set to [Off], images shot vertically will be displayed vertically, and rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation. 150 ç Contents Tagging Images as Favorites Still Images Movies You can organize images by tagging them as favorites. By choosing a category in filtered playback, you can restrict the following operations to all of those images. ●● “Viewing” (= 124), “Viewing Slideshows” (= 133), “Protecting Images” (= 137), “Erasing Images” (= 142), “Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF)” (= 200), “Adding Images to a Photobook” (= 205) ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [ ] in the menu (= 47). ●● [Tagged as Favorite] is displayed. ●● To untag the image, repeat this process and choose [ ] again, and then press the [ ] button. Using the Menu 1 Choose [Favorites]. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Favorites] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 151 ç Contents 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. [ ] is displayed. ●● To untag the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ●● Repeat this process to choose additional images. 3 Finish the setup process. ●● Press the [ ] button. A confirmation message is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3. ●● Favorite images will have a three-star rating ( ) when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7. (Does not apply to movies.) 152 ç Contents Editing Still Images ●● Image editing (= 152 – = 159) is only available when the memory card has sufficient free space. Resizing Images Still Images Movies Save a copy of images at a lower resolution. 1 Choose [Resize]. ●● Press the [ ] button and choose [Resize] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an image size. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the size, and then press the [ ] button. ●● [Save new image?] is displayed. 153 ç Contents 4 Save the new image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The image is now saved as a new file. 5 Review the new image. ●● Press the [ ] button. [Display new image?] is displayed. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Yes], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The saved image is now displayed. ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (= 73). ●● Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution. 154 ç Contents Cropping Still Images Movies You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file. 1 Choose [Cropping]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Cropping] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. (1) (2) (3) 3 Adjust the cropping area. ●● A frame is displayed around the portion of the image to be cropped (1). ●● The original image is shown in the upper left, and a preview of the image as cropped (2) is shown in the lower right. You can also see the resolution after cropping (3). ●● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. ●● To move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. ●● To change the frame orientation, ] button. press the [ 155 ç Contents ●● Faces detected in the image are enclosed in gray frames in the upper-left image. To crop the image based on this frame, press the [ ] button to switch to the other frame. ●● Press the [ ] button. 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 152). ●● Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of [ ] (= 73) or resized to [ ] (= 152). ●● Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping. ●● Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images. 156 ç Contents Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors) Still Images Movies You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate file. For details on each option, see “Changing Image Color Tones (My Colors)” (= 105). 1 Choose [My Colors]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [My Colors] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 152). ●● Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little lower each time, and you may not be able to obtain the desired color. 157 ç Contents ●● The color of images edited using this function may vary slightly from the color of images shot using My Colors (= 105). Correcting Image Brightness (i-Contrast) Still Images Movies Excessively dark image areas (such as faces or backgrounds) can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness. Insufficient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected, to make subjects stand out better. Choose from four correction levels, and then save the image as a separate file. 1 Choose [i-Contrast]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [i-Contrast] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose an option. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 158 ç Contents 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● Follow steps 4 – 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 152). ●● For some images, correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy. ●● Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function. ●● If [Auto] does not produce the expected results, try correcting images using [Low], [Medium], or [High]. Correcting Red-Eye Still Images Movies Automatically corrects images affected by red-eye. You can save the corrected image as a separate file. 1 Choose [Red-Eye Correction]. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Red-Eye Correction] on the [ ] tab (= 49). 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. 159 ç Contents 3 Correct the image. ●● Press the [ ] button. ●● Red-eye detected by the camera is now corrected, and frames are displayed around corrected image areas. ●● Enlarge or reduce images as needed. Follow the steps in “Magnifying Images” (= 132). 4 Save as a new image and review. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The image is now saved as a new file. ●● Follow step 5 in “Resizing Images” (= 152). ●● Some images may not be corrected accurately. ●● To overwrite the original image with the corrected image, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original image will be erased. ●● Protected images cannot be overwritten. 160 ç Contents Editing Movies Still Images Movies You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end. 1 Choose [ ]. ●● Following steps 1 – 5 in “Viewing” (= 124), choose [ ] and press the [ ] button. ●● The movie editing panel and editing bar are now displayed. 2 Specify portions to cut. (1) ●● (1) is the movie editing panel, and (2) is the editing bar. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ] or [ ]. (2) ●● To view the portions you can cut (identified by [ ] on the screen), press the [ ][ ] buttons to move [ ]. Cut the beginning of the movie (from [ ]) by choosing [ ], and cut the end of the movie by choosing [ ]. ●● If you move [ ] to a position other than a [ ] mark, in [ ] the portion before the nearest [ ] mark on the left will be cut, while in [ ] the portion after the nearest [ ] mark on the right will be cut. 161 ç Contents 3 Review the edited movie. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. The edited movie is now played. ●● To edit the movie again, repeat step 2. ●● To cancel editing, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ]. Press the [ ] button, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button again. 4 Save the edited movie. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose [New File], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The movie is now saved as a new file. ●● To overwrite the original movie with the cut one, choose [Overwrite] in step 4. In this case, the original movie will be erased. ●● If the memory card lacks sufficient space, only [Overwrite] will be available. ●● Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving is in progress. ●● When editing movies, you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit (sold separately, = 179). ç Contents 162 6 Setting Menu Customize or adjust basic camera functions for greater convenience 163 ç Contents Adjusting Basic Camera Functions MENU (= 49) functions on the [ ] tab can be configured. Customize commonly used functions as desired, for greater convenience. Silencing Camera Operations Silence camera sounds and movies as follows. ●● Choose [Mute], and then choose [On]. ●● Operation can also be silenced by holding down the [ ] button as you turn the camera on. ●● Sound is not played during movies (= 124) if you mute camera sounds. To restore sound during movies, press the [ ] button. Adjust volume with the [ ][ ] buttons, as needed. 164 ç Contents Adjusting the Volume Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows. ●● Choose [Volume], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Choose an item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the volume. Hiding Hints and Tips Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC. (= 47) or MENU (= 49) items. If you prefer, you can deactivate this information. ●● Choose [Hints & Tips], and then choose [Off]. 165 ç Contents Date and Time Adjust the date and time as follows. ●● Choose [Date/Time], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the setting. World Clock To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel abroad, simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone. This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date/Time setting manually. Before using the world clock, be sure to set the date and time and your home time zone, as described in “Setting the Date and Time” (= 31). 1 Specify your destination. ●● Choose [Time Zone], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ World], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the destination. 166 ç Contents ●● To set daylight saving time (1 hour ahead), choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then choose [ ] by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons. ●● Press the [ ] button. 2 Switch to the destination time zone. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ World], and then press the [ ] button. ●● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 221). ●● Adjusting the date or time while in [ ] mode (= 32) will automatically update your [ Home] time and date. Lens Retraction Timing The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the [ ] button in Shooting mode (= 43). To have the lens retracted immediately after you press the [ ] button, set the retraction timing to [0 sec.]. ●● Choose [Lens Retraction], and then choose [0 sec.]. 167 ç Contents Using Eco Mode This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode. When the camera is not in use, the screen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption. 1 Configure the setting. ●● Choose [Eco Mode], and then choose [On]. ●● [ ] is now shown on the shooting screen (= 221). ●● The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approximately two seconds; approximately ten seconds after darkening, the screen turns off. The camera turns off after approximately three minutes of inactivity. 2 Shoot. ●● To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out, press the shutter button halfway. 168 ç Contents Power-Saving Adjustment Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation (Auto Power Down and Display Off, respectively) as needed (= 44). ●● Choose [Power Saving], and then press the [ ] button. ●● After choosing an item, press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust it as needed. ●● To conserve battery power, you should normally choose [On] for [Auto Power Down] and [1 min.] or less for [Display Off]. ●● The [Display Off] setting is applied even if you set [Auto Power Down] to [Off]. ●● These power-saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode (= 167) to [On]. 169 ç Contents Screen Brightness Adjust screen brightness as follows. ●● Choose [LCD Brightness], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the brightness. ●● For maximum brightness, press and hold the [ ] button for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single-image display. (This will override the [LCD Brightness] setting on the [ ] tab.) To restore the original ] button again for at least brightness, press and hold the [ one second or restart the camera. Hiding the Start-Up Screen If you prefer, you can deactivate display of the start-up screen normally shown when you turn the camera on. ●● Choose [Start-up Image], and then choose [Off]. 170 ç Contents Formatting Memory Cards Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device, you should format the card with this camera. Formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. An Eye-Fi card (= 208) contains software on the card itself. Before formatting an Eye-Fi card, install the software on a computer. 1 Access the [Format] screen. ●● Choose [Format], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose [OK]. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Cancel], press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 3 Format the memory card. ●● To begin the formatting process, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● When formatting is finished, [Memory card formatting complete] is displayed. Press the [ ] button. 171 ç Contents ●● Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely. When transferring or disposing of memory cards, take steps to protect personal information if necessary, as by physically destroying cards. ●● The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the advertised capacity. Low-Level Formatting Perform low-level formatting in the following cases: [Memory card error] is displayed, the camera is not working correctly, card image reading/writing is slower, continuous shooting is slower, or movie recording suddenly stops. Low-level formatting erases all data on a memory card. Before low-level formatting, copy images on the memory card to a computer, or take other steps to back them up. ●● On the screen in step 2 of “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 170), press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Low Level Format], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to select this option. A [ ] icon is displayed. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 170) to continue with the formatting process. ç Contents 172 ●● Low-level formatting takes longer than “Formatting Memory Cards” (= 170), because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card. ●● You can cancel low-level formatting in progress by choosing [Stop]. In this case, all data will be erased, but the memory card can be used normally. File Numbering Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order (0001 – 9999) and saved in folders that store up to 2,000 images each. You can change how the camera assigns file numbers. ●● Choose [File Numbering], and then choose an option. Continuous Images are numbered consecutively (until the 9999th shot is taken/saved) even if you switch memory cards. Auto Reset Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards, or when a new folder is created. 173 ç Contents ●● Regardless of the option selected in this setting, shots may be numbered consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards. To start saving shots from 0001, use an empty (or formatted (= 170)) memory card. Date-Based Image Storage Instead of saving images in folders created each month, you can have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day. ●● Choose [Create Folder], and then choose [Daily]. ●● Images will now be saved in folders created on the shooting date. 174 ç Contents Checking Certification Logos Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed on the screen. Other certification logos are printed in this guide, on the camera packaging, or on the camera body. ●● Choose [Certification Logo Display], and then press the [ button. ] Display Language Change the display language as needed. ●● Choose [Language ], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons to choose a language, and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can also access the [Language] screen in Playback mode by pressing and holding the [ ] button and immediately pressing ] button. the [ 175 ç Contents Adjusting Other Settings The following settings can also be adjusted on the [ ] tab. ●● [Video System] (= 182) ●● [Eye-Fi Settings] (= 208) Restoring Defaults If you accidentally change a setting, you can restore default camera settings. 1 Access the [Reset All] screen. ●● Choose [Reset All], and then press the [ ] button. 2 Restore default settings. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Default settings are now restored. ●● The following functions are not restored to default settings. -- [ ] tab settings [Date/Time] (= 165), [Time Zone] (= 165), ] (= 174), and [Video System] (= 182) [Language -- Custom white balance data you have recorded (= 105) -- Shooting mode (= 85) ç Contents 176 7 Accessories Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon accessories and other compatible accessories sold separately 177 ç Contents System Map Included Accessories Wrist Strap Battery Pack NB-11LH*1 Battery Charger CB-2LF/CB-2LFE*1 Lens Cap (with cord) USB Cable (camera end: Mini-B)*2 Memory Card Power Card Reader AV Cable AVC-DC400 AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC90 Computer Cables Flash Unit TV/Video System PictBridge-Compatible Printers High-Power Flash HF-DC2 *1 Also available for purchase separately. *2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available (Interface Cable IFC‑400PCU). ç Contents 178 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended. This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of nongenuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis. 179 ç Contents Optional Accessories The following camera accessories are sold separately. Note that availability varies by area, and some accessories may no longer be available. Power Supplies Battery Pack NB-11LH ●● Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Battery Charger CB-2LF/CB-2LFE ●● Charger for Battery Pack NB‑11LH ●● The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know the charge status at a glance. Attach the cover so is visible on a charged battery pack, and attach it so that that is not visible on an uncharged battery pack. ●● Battery Pack NB-11L is also supported. ●● Battery Charger CB-2LD and CB-2LDE are also supported. 180 ç Contents AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC90 ●● For powering the camera using household power. Recommended when using the camera over extended periods, or when connecting the camera to a printer or computer. Cannot be used to charge the battery pack in the camera. ●● The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with 100 – 240 V AC power (50/60 Hz). ●● For power outlets in a different format, use a commercially available adapter for the plug. Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling, which may damage the battery pack. Flash Unit High-Power Flash HF-DC2 ●● External flash for illuminating subjects that are out of range of the built-in flash. 181 ç Contents Other Accessories Interface Cable IFC-400PCU ●● For connecting the camera to a computer or printer. AV Cable AVC-DC400 ●● Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy playback on the larger TV screen. Printer Canon-Brand PictBridgeCompatible Printers ●● Even without using a computer, you can print images by connecting the camera directly to a printer. For details, visit your nearest Canon retailer. 182 ç Contents Using Optional Accessories Still Images Movies Still Images Movies Playback on a TV Connecting the camera to a TV with the AV Cable AVC-DC400 (sold separately) enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV as you control the camera. For details on connection or how to switch inputs, refer to the TV manual. ●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (= 223). 1 Make sure the camera and TV are off. 2 Connect the camera to the TV. ●● On the TV, insert the cable plugs fully into the video inputs as shown. ●● Make sure the cable plugs are in video inputs of the same color. 183 ç Contents ●● On the camera, open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal. 3 Turn the TV on and switch to video input. ●● Switch the TV input to the video input you connected the cable to in step 2. 4 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the [ camera on. ] button to turn the ●● Images from the camera are now displayed on the TV. (Nothing is displayed on the camera screen.) ●● When finished, turn off the camera and TV before disconnecting the cable. ●● Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format (NTSC or PAL) matches the TV format. To change the ] button and choose video output format, press the [ [Video System] on the [ ] tab. 184 ç Contents Powering the Camera with Household Power Still Images Movies Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC90 (sold separately) eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level. 1 Make sure the camera is off. 2 Open the cover. (2) (1) ●● Follow step 1 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 28) to open the memory card/ battery cover, and then open the coupler cable port cover as shown. 3 Insert the coupler. ●● Holding the coupler with the terminals (1) facing as shown, insert the coupler just as you would a battery pack (following step 2 in “Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card” (= 28)). (1) ●● Make sure the coupler cable passes through the port (1). (1) 185 ç Contents (1) (2) 4 Close the cover. ●● Lower the cover (1) and hold it down as you slide it, until it clicks into the closed position (2). 5 Connect the power cord. ●● Insert the adapter plug into the end of the coupler cable. ●● Insert one end of the power cord into the compact power adapter, and then plug the other end into a power outlet. ●● Turn the camera on and use it as desired. ●● When finished, turn the camera off and unplug the power cord from the outlet. ●● Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the camera is still on. This may erase your shots or damage the camera. ●● Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects. Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product. 186 ç Contents Using the Software After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it on the computer you are using, you can do the following things. ●● CameraWindow -- Import images and change camera settings ●● When viewing or editing images on a computer, always use software that supports the images shot on the camera (software normally installed on the computer or general-use software). Checking Your Computer Environment The software can be used on the following computers. For detailed system requirements and compatibility information, including support in new operating systems, visit the Canon website. Operating System Windows Windows 8/8.1 Windows 7 SP1 Mac OS Mac OS X 10.9 Mac OS X 10.8 ●● Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements, including supported OS versions. 187 ç Contents Installing the Software Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10.8 are used here for the sake of illustration. 1 Download the software. ●● With a computer connected to the Internet, access http://www. canon.com/icpd/. ●● Access the site for your country or region. ●● Download the software. 2 Install the files. ●● Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to complete the installation process. ●● Installation may take some time, depending on computer performance and the Internet connection. ●● Click [Finish] or [Restart] on the screen after installation. ●● Internet access is required, and any ISP account charges and access fees must be paid separately. 188 ç Contents ●● Follow the steps below to uninstall (delete) the software. -- In Windows, click in the following order: [Start] menu > [All Programs] > [Canon Utilities], and then choose the software you want to uninstall. -- In Mac OS, click on [Applications] folder , choose the [Canon Utilities] folder, drag the folder of the software you want to uninstall to the trash, and then empty the trash. Saving Images to a Computer Connecting the camera to a computer with a commercial USB cable (the camera terminal is Mini-B) enables you to import your shots. 1 Connect the camera to the computer. (2) (1) ●● With the camera turned off, open the cover (1). With the smaller plug of the USB cable in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal (2). ●● Insert the larger plug of the USB cable in the computer’s USB port. For details about USB connections on the computer, refer to the computer user manual. 189 ç Contents 2 Turn the camera on to access CameraWindow. ●● Press the [ camera on. ] button to turn the ●● Mac OS: CameraWindow is displayed when a connection is established between the camera and computer. ●● Windows: Follow the steps introduced below. ●● In the screen that displays, click the [ ] link to modify the program. ●● Choose [Downloads Images From Canon Camera] and then click [OK]. ●● Double-click [ ]. 3 Save the images to the computer. ●● Click [Import Images from Camera], and then click [Import Untransferred Images]. ç Contents 190 ●● Images are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer, in separate folders named by date. ●● After images are saved, close ] CameraWindow, press the [ button to turn the camera off, and unplug the cable. ●● When viewing imported images on a computer, always use software that supports the images shot on the camera (software normally installed on the computer or general-use software). ●● Windows 7: If the screen in step 2 is not displayed, click the [ ] icon in the taskbar. ●● Mac OS: If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2, click the [CameraWindow] icon in the Dock. ●● Although you can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software, the following limitations apply. -- It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible. -- Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation. -- Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer. -- Some problems may occur when saving images or image information, depending on the operating system version, the software in use, or image file sizes. 191 ç Contents Printing Images Still Images Movies Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer. On the camera, you can specify images to set up batch printing, prepare orders for photo development services, and prepare orders or print images for photobooks. A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the sake of illustration. Screens displayed and available functions vary by printer. Also refer to the printer manual for additional information. Easy Print Still Images Movies Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridgecompatible printer (sold separately) with the USB cable. 1 Make sure the camera and printer are off. 192 ç Contents 2 Connect the camera to the printer. ●● Open the terminal cover. Holding the smaller cable plug in the orientation shown, insert the plug fully into the camera terminal. ●● Connect the larger cable plug to the printer. For other connection details, refer to the printer manual. 3 Turn the printer on. 4 Turn the camera on. ●● Press the [ camera on. ] button to turn the 5 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image. 6 Access the printing screen. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [ ], and press the [ ] button again. 193 ç Contents 7 Print the image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print], and then press the [ ] button. ●● Printing now begins. ●● To print other images, repeat the above procedures starting from step 5 after printing is finished. ●● When you are finished printing, turn the camera and printer off and disconnect the cable. ●● For Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers (sold separately), see “Printer” (= 181). Configuring Print Settings Still Images Movies 1 Access the printing screen. ●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” (= 191) to access this screen. 2 Configure the settings. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an item, and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. 194 ç Contents Default Date File No. Both Off Default Off On Red-Eye 1 No. of Copies Cropping – Paper Settings – Matches current printer settings. Prints images with the date added. Prints images with the file number added. Prints images with both the date and file number added. – Matches current printer settings. – Uses information from the time of shooting to print under optimal settings. Corrects red-eye. Choose the number of copies to print. Specify a desired image area to print (= 195). Specify the paper size, layout, and other details (= 196). 195 ç Contents Cropping Images before Printing Still Images Movies By cropping images before printing, you can print a desired image area instead of the entire image. 1 Choose [Cropping]. ●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 193) to access the printing screen, choose [Cropping] and press the [ ] button. ●● A cropping frame is now displayed, indicating the image area to print. 2 Adjust the cropping frame as needed. ●● To resize the frame, move the zoom lever. ●● To move the frame, press the [ ][ ][ ][ ] buttons. ●● To rotate the frame, press the ] button. [ ●● When finished, press the [ ] button. 3 Print the image. ●● Follow step 7 in “Easy Print” (= 191) to print. 196 ç Contents ●● Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes, or at some aspect ratios. ●● Dates may not be printed correctly if you crop images shot with ] selected. [Date Stamp Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing Still Images Movies 1 Choose [Paper Settings]. ●● After following step 1 in “Configuring Print Settings” (= 193) to access the printing screen, choose [Paper Settings] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose a paper size. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose a type of paper. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option, and then press the [ ] button. 197 ç Contents 4 Choose a layout. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an option. ●● When choosing [N-up], press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the number of images per sheet. ●● Press the [ ] button. 5 Print the image. Available Layout Options Default Bordered Borderless N-up ID Photo Fixed Size Matches current printer settings. Prints with blank space around the image. Borderless, edge-to-edge printing. Choose how many images to print per sheet. Prints images for identification purposes. Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of 4:3. Choose the print size. Choose from 3.5 x 5 in., postcard, or wide-format prints. 198 ç Contents Printing ID Photos Still Images Movies 1 Choose [ID Photo]. ●● Following steps 1 – 4 in “Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing” (= 196), choose [ID Photo] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose the long and short side length. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an item. Choose the length by pressing the [ ][ ] buttons, and then press the [ ] button. 3 Choose the printing area. ●● Follow step 2 in “Cropping Images before Printing” (= 195) to choose the printing area. 4 Print the image. 199 ç Contents Printing Movie Scenes Still Images Movies 1 Access the printing screen. ●● Follow steps 1 – 6 in “Easy Print” (= 191) to choose a movie. This screen is displayed. 2 Choose a printing method. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [ ], and then press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose the printing method. 3 Print the image. Movie Printing Options Single Sequence Prints the current scene as a still image. Prints a series of scenes, a certain interval apart, on a single sheet of paper. You can also print the folder number, file number, and elapsed time for the frame by setting [Caption] to [On]. ●● To cancel printing, press the [ ] button, choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button again. ●● [ID Photo] and [Sequence] cannot be chosen on Canon-brand PictBridge-compatible printers from CP720/CP730 and earlier models. 200 ç Contents Adding Images to the Print List (DPOF) Still Images Movies Batch printing (= 204) and ordering prints from a photo development service can be set up on the camera. Choose up to 998 images on a memory card and configure relevant settings, such as the number of copies, as follows. The printing information you prepare this way will conform to DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standards. Configuring Print Settings Still Images Movies Specify the printing format, whether to add the date or file number, and other settings as follows. These settings apply to all images in the print list. ●● Press the [ ] button, and then choose [Print Settings] on the [ ] tab. Choose and configure items as desired (= 49). ç Contents Standard Print Type Index Both Date File No. Clear DPOF data On Off On Off On Off 201 One image is printed per sheet. Smaller versions of multiple images are printed per sheet. Both standard and index formats are printed. Images are printed with the shooting date. – Images are printed with the file number. – All image print list settings are cleared after printing. – ●● Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the printer or photo development service, in some cases. ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. ●● Setting [Date] to [On] may cause some printers to print the date twice. ●● Specifying [Index] will prevent you from choosing [On] for both [Date] and [File No.] at the same time. ●● Index printing is not available on some Canon-brand PictBridgecompatible printers (sold separately). ●● The date is printed in a format matching setting details in [Date/ Time] on the [ ] tab (= 31). 202 ç Contents Setting Up Printing for Individual Images Still Images Movies 1 Choose [Select Images & Qty.]. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Select Images & Qty.] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button. 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● You can now specify the number of copies. ●● If you specify index printing for the image, it is labeled with a [ ] icon. To cancel index printing for the image, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. 3 Specify the number of prints. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to specify the number of prints (up to 99). ●● To set up printing for other images and specify the number of prints, repeat steps 2 – 3. ●● Printing quantity cannot be specified for index prints. You can only choose which images to print, by following step 2. ●● When finished, press the [ ] button to return to the menu screen. 203 ç Contents Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images Still Images Movies ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 202), choose [Select Range] and press the [ ] button. ●● Follow steps 2 – 3 in “Selecting a Range” (= 139) to specify images. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Order], and then press the [ ] button. Setting Up Printing for All Images Still Images Movies ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 202), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 204 ç Contents Clearing All Images from the Print List ●● Following step 1 in “Setting Up Printing for Individual Images” (= 202), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Printing Images Added to the Print List (DPOF) Still Images Movies ●● When images have been added to the print list (= 200 – = 203), this screen is displayed after you connect the camera to a PictBridge-compatible printer. Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [Print now], and then simply press the [ ] button to print the images in the print list. ●● Any DPOF print job that you temporarily stop will be resumed from the next image. 205 ç Contents Adding Images to a Photobook Still Images Movies Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer, where they are stored in their own folder. This is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer. Choosing a Selection Method ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Photobook Set-up] on the [ ] tab, and then choose how you will select images. ●● [ ] may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera. Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings. 206 ç Contents Adding Images Individually Still Images Movies 1 Choose [Select]. ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 205), choose [Select] and press the [ ] button. 2 Choose an image. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose an image, and then press the [ ] button. ●● [ ] is displayed. ●● To remove the image from the photobook, press the [ ] button again. [ ] is no longer displayed. ●● Repeat this process to specify other images. ●● When finished, press the ] button to return to the [ menu screen. 207 ç Contents Adding All Images to a Photobook Still Images Movies ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 205), choose [Select All Images] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. Removing All Images from a Photobook Still Images Movies ●● Following the procedure in “Choosing a Selection Method” (= 205), choose [Clear All Selections] and press the [ ] button. ●● Press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [OK], and then press the [ ] button. 208 ç Contents Using an Eye-Fi Card Still Images Movies Before using an Eye-Fi card, always confirm that local use is permitted (= 3). Inserting a prepared Eye-Fi card enables automatic wireless transfer of images to a computer or uploading to a photo-sharing website. Images are transferred by the Eye-Fi card. Refer to the card’s user manual or contact the manufacturer for instructions on preparing and using cards or resolving transfer problems. ●● When using an Eye-Fi card, keep the following points in mind. -- Cards may continue to transmit radio waves even when [EyeFi trans.] is set to [Disable] (= 210). Remove the Eye-Fi card before entering hospitals, aircraft, or other areas where transmission is prohibited. -- When troubleshooting image transfer issues, check the card and computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s user manual. -- Poor Eye-Fi connections may cause image transfer to take a long time, and transfer may be interrupted in some cases. -- Eye-Fi cards may become hot, due to their transfer functions. -- Battery power will be consumed faster than in normal use. -- Camera operation may become sluggish. To resolve this, try setting [Eye-Fi trans.] to [Disable]. 209 ç Contents Connection status of Eye-Fi cards in the camera can be checked on the shooting screen (in regular information display mode) or playback screen (in simple information display mode). (Gray) Not connected (Blinking white) Connecting (White) Connected (Animated) Transfer in progress*1 Interrupted Not communicating Error acquiring Eye-Fi card information*2 *1 Power saving (= 44) on the camera is temporarily disabled during image transfer. *2 Restart the camera. Repeated display of this icon may indicate a problem with the card. Images labeled with a [ ] icon have been transferred. Checking Connection Information Check the access point SSID used by the Eye-Fi card or the connection status, as needed. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Eye-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Choose [Connection info], and then press the [ ] button. ●● The connection information screen is displayed. 210 ç Contents Disabling Eye-Fi Transfer Configure the setting as follows to disable Eye-Fi transfer by the card, if necessary. ●● Press the [ ] button, choose [Eye-Fi Settings] on the [ ] tab, and then press the [ ] button. ●● Choose [Eye-Fi trans.], and then choose [Disable]. ●● [Eye-Fi Settings] is not shown unless an Eye-Fi card is in the camera with its write-protect tab in the unlocked position. For this reason, you cannot change settings for an inserted Eye-Fi card if the write-protect tab is in the locked position. ç Contents Appendix Helpful information when using the camera 211 8 ç Contents 212 Troubleshooting If you think there is a problem with the camera, first check the following. If the items below do not solve your problem, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Power Nothing happens when the power button is pressed. ●● ●● ●● ●● Confirm that the battery pack is charged (= 26). Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way (= 28). Confirm that the memory card/battery cover is fully closed (= 28). Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. The battery pack runs out of power quickly. ●● Battery performance decreases at low temperatures. Try warming the battery pack a little by putting it in your pocket, for example, ensuring that the terminals do not touch any metal objects. ●● Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance. Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times. ●● If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after charging, it has reached the end of its life. Purchase a new battery pack. The lens is not retracted. ●● Do not open the memory card/battery cover while the camera is on. Close the cover, turn the camera on, and then turn it off again (= 28). The battery pack is swollen. ●● Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns. However, if battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ç Contents 213 Display on a TV Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV (= 182). Shooting Cannot shoot. ●● In Playback mode (= 123), press the shutter button halfway (= 45). Strange display on the screen under low light (= 46). Strange display on the screen when shooting. ●● Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded in movies. -- The screen may darken under bright light. -- The screen may flicker under fluorescent or LED lighting. -- Purplish banding may appear on the screen if you compose a shot that includes a bright light source. No date stamp is added to images. ●● Configure the [Date Stamp ] setting (= 31). Note that date stamps are not added to images automatically, merely because you have configured the [Date/Time] setting (= 69). ●● Date stamps are not added in shooting modes (= 230) in which this setting cannot be configured (= 69). [ ] flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed, and shooting is not possible (= 58). [ ●● ●● ●● ●● ] is displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway (= 58). Set [IS Mode] to [Continuous] (= 121). Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 117). Increase the ISO speed (= 102). Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still. Additionally, you should set [IS Mode] to [Off] when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera (= 121). 214 ç Contents Shots are out of focus. ●● Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way down to shoot (= 45). ●● Make sure subjects are within focusing range (= 243). ●● Set [AF-assist Beam] to [On] (= 79). ●● Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated. ●● Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock (= 110, = 116). No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway. ●● To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly, try composing the shot with higher-contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button halfway. Otherwise, try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly. Subjects in shots look too dark. ●● ●● ●● ●● Raise the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 117). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 99). Adjust contrast by using i-Contrast (= 103, = 157). Use AE lock or spot metering (= 100, = 101). Subjects look too bright, highlights are washed-out. ●● ●● ●● ●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 54). Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation (= 99). Use AE lock or spot metering (= 100, = 101). Reduce the lighting on subjects. Shots look too dark despite the flash firing (= 58). ●● Shoot within flash range (= 242). ●● Increase the ISO speed (= 102). Subjects in flash shots look too bright, highlights are washed-out. ●● Shoot within flash range (= 242). ●● Lower the flash and set the flash mode to [ ] (= 54). White dots or similar image artifacts appear in flash shots. ●● This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles. ç Contents 215 Shots look grainy. ●● Lower the ISO speed (= 102). Subjects are affected by red-eye. ●● Set [Red-Eye Lamp] to [On] (= 80) to activate the red-eye reduction lamp (= 4) in flash shots. Note that while the red-eye reduction lamp is on (for about one second), it is not possible to shoot, because the lamp is counteracting red-eye. For best results, have subjects look at the red-eye reduction lamp. Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range. ●● Edit images using red-eye correction (= 158). Recording to the memory card takes too long, or continuous shooting is slower. ●● Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 171). Shooting settings or FUNC. menu settings are not available. ●● Available setting items vary by shooting mode. Refer to “Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode”, “FUNC. Menu”, and “Shooting Tab” (= 225 – = 230). Shooting Movies The elapsed time shown is incorrect, or recording is interrupted. ●● Use the camera to format the memory card, or switch to a card that supports high-speed recording. Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect, the length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time (= 170, = 242). [ ] is displayed and shooting stops automatically. ●● The camera’s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the memory card quickly enough. Try one of the following measures. -- Use the camera to perform low-level formatting of the memory card (= 171). -- Lower the image quality (= 74). -- Switch to a memory card that supports high-speed recording (= 242). 216 ç Contents Zooming is not possible. ●● Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in [ ] mode (= 89). Playback Playback is not possible. ●● Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or alter the folder structure. Playback stops, or audio skips. ●● Switch to a memory card that you have performed low-level formatting on with the camera (= 171). ●● There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that have slow read speeds. ●● When movies are played on a computer, frames may be dropped and audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate. Sound is not played during movies. ●● Adjust the volume (= 164) if you have activated [Mute] (= 163) or the sound in the movie is faint. ●● No sound is played for movies shot in [ ] mode (= 89) because audio is not recorded in this mode. Memory Card The memory card is not recognized. ●● Restart the camera, with the memory card in it (= 43). ç Contents 217 Computer Cannot transfer images to a computer. ●● When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable, try reducing the transfer speed as follows. ] button to enter Playback mode. Hold the [ ] -- Press the [ button down as you press the [ ] and [ ] buttons at the same time. On the next screen, press the [ ][ ] buttons to choose [B], and then press the [ ] button. Eye-Fi Cards Cannot transfer images (= 208). ç Contents 218 On-Screen Messages If an error message is displayed, respond as follows. No memory card ●● The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way. Reinsert the memory card facing the correct way (= 28). Memory card locked ●● The write-protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position. Switch the write-protect tab to the unlocked position (= 28). Cannot record! ●● Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera. To shoot, insert a memory card facing the correct way (= 28). Memory card error (= 171) ●● If the same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported memory card (= 3) and have inserted it facing the correct way (= 28), contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. Insufficient space on card ●● There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot (= 54, = 83, = 97) or edit images (= 152). Either erase unneeded images (= 142) or insert a memory card with enough free space (= 28). Charge the battery (= 26) No Image. ●● The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed. Protected! (= 137) Unidentified Image/Incompatible JPEG/Image too large./Cannot play back MOV/Cannot play back MP4 ●● Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed. ●● It may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer, or images shot with another camera. ç Contents 219 Cannot magnify!/Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle/ Cannot rotate/Cannot modify image/Cannot modify/Cannot assign to category/Unselectable image. ●● The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already edited on a computer, or images shot with another camera. Note that starred (*) functions are not available for movies. Magnify* (= 132), Smart Shuffle* (= 135), Rotate* (= 147), Favorites (= 150), Edit* (= 152), Print List* (= 200), and Photobook Set-up* (= 205). Invalid selection range ●● When specifying a range for image selection (= 139, = 145, = 203), you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image, or vice-versa. Exceeded selection limit ●● More than 998 images were selected for Print List (= 200) or Photobook Set-up (= 205). Choose 998 images or less. ●● Print List (= 200) or Photobook Set-up (= 205) settings could not be saved correctly. Reduce the number of selected images and try again. ●● You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect (= 137), Erase (= 142), Favorites (= 150), Print List (= 200), or Photobook Set-up (= 205). Naming error! ●● The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded, because the highest supported folder number (999) for storing images on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number (9999) for images in folders has been reached. On the [ ] tab, change [File Numbering] to [Auto Reset] (= 172), or format the memory card (= 170). Lens Error ●● This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving, or when the camera is used in dusty or sandy locations. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ç Contents 220 A camera error was detected (error number) ●● If this error message is displayed immediately after a shot, the image may not have been saved. Switch to Playback mode to check for the image. ●● Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage. In this case, write down the error number (Exx) and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. File Error ●● Correct printing (= 191) may not be possible for photos from other cameras or images that have been altered using computer software, even if the camera is connected to the printer. Print error ●● Check the paper size setting (= 196). If this error message is displayed when the setting is correct, restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again. Ink absorber full ●● Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber replacement. 221 ç Contents On-Screen Information Shooting (Information Display) (27) (28) (9)(10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (29) (16) (17) (18) (7) (8) (22) (23) (24) (25) (26) (30) (31) (19) (20) (21) (32) (1) Battery level (= 222) (8) Metering method (= 101) (2) White balance (= 104) (9) (3) My Colors (= 105) Eye-Fi connection status (= 208) (10) Still image compression (= 120), Resolution (= 73) (4) Drive mode (= 71) (5) Eco mode (= 167) (6) Self-timer (= 66) (11) Recordable shots (= 241) (7) Camera shake warning (= 58) (13) Remaining time (= 242) (12) Movie quality (= 74) 222 ç Contents (14) Digital zoom magnification (= 64), Digital tele-converter (= 109) (23) AE lock (= 100), FE lock (= 119) (15) Focusing range (= 108, = 109), AF lock (= 116) (25) Aperture value (16) Shooting mode (= 225), Scene icon (= 60) (17) Flash mode (= 117) (18) AF frame (= 110), Spot AE point frame (= 101) (19) Date stamp (= 69) (20) ISO speed (= 102) (21) i-Contrast (= 103) (22) Grid lines (= 75) (24) Shutter speed (26) Exposure compensation level (= 99) (27) Zoom bar (= 54) (28) IS mode icon (= 62) (29) Blink detection (= 77) (30) Time zone (= 165) (31) Image stabilization (= 121) (32) Exposure compensation bar (= 99) Battery Level An on-screen icon or message indicates the battery charge level. Display Details Sufficient charge Slightly depleted, but sufficient (Blinking red) [Charge the battery] Nearly depleted—charge the battery pack soon Depleted—charge the battery pack immediately 223 ç Contents Playback (Detailed Information Display) (8) (9)(10) (11) (1) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (19) (7) (20) (21)(22) (23) (24) Movies (= 54, = 124) Shooting mode (= 225) ISO speed (= 102), Playback speed (= 90) (4) Exposure compensation level (= 99) (5) White balance (= 104) (6) Histogram (= 128) (7) Compression (image quality) (= 120) / Resolution (= 73), MOV (movies) (8) Transferred via Eye-Fi (= 208) (9) Battery level (= 222) (10) Metering method (= 101) (11) Folder number - File number (= 172) (1) (2) (3) (25) (12) Current image no. / Total no. of images (13) Shutter speed (still images), Image quality / Frame rate (movies) (= 74) (14) Aperture value (15) Flash (= 117) (16) i-Contrast (= 103, = 157) (17) Focusing range (= 108, = 109) (18) File size (19) Still images: Resolution (= 241) Movies: Playback time (= 242) (20) Image editing (= 152) 224 ç Contents (21) Protection (= 137) (22) Favorites (= 150) (23) My Colors (= 105, = 156) (24) Red-eye correction (= 158) (25) Shooting date/time (= 31) ●● Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV (= 182). Summary of Movie Control Panel The following operations are available on the movie control panel accessed as described in “Viewing” (= 124). Exit Play Slow Motion (Press the [ ][ ] buttons to adjust the playback speed. No sound is played.) Skip Backward* (To continue skipping backward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Previous Frame (For fast-rewind, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Next Frame (For fast-forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Skip Forward* (To continue skipping forward, keep holding down the [ ] button.) Edit (= 160) Shown when the camera is connected to a PictBridgecompatible printer (= 191). * Displays the frame approx. 4 sec. before or after the current frame. ●● To skip forward or back during movie playback, press the [ ][ ] buttons. 225 ç Contents Functions and Menu Tables Available or automatically set functions are indicated by black icons, such as . Unavailable functions are indicated by gray icons, such as . Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode Exposure Compensation (= 99) / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / Self-Timer (= 66) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Self-Timer Settings (= 68) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Flash (= 117) / / / / 226 ç Contents / / / / / *2 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / AE Lock/FE Lock (= 100, = 119)*3 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / AF Lock (= 116) / / / / Focusing Range (= 108, = 109) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Tracking AF (= 112) / / / / / 227 ç Contents Change Display (= 46) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / *1 Settings [Dark ‒ Light]. *2 Not available, but switches to [ ] in some cases. *3 FE lock not available in [ ] flash mode. FUNC. Menu Metering Method (= 101) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / My Colors (= 105) / / / / / / / *1 / / / / *1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / *2 / 228 ç Contents White Balance (= 104) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / ISO Speed (= 102) / / / / / / / / / / / / Drive Mode (= 71) / / / / / / Still Image Aspect Ratio (= 72) / / / / / / / / 229 ç Contents / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Resolution (= 73) / / / / / / / / / / / Compression (= 120) / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 230 ç Contents Movie Quality (= 74) / / / / / / / / / / *3 / / / / / *1 White balance is not available. *2 Set in a range of 1 – 5: contrast, sharpness, color saturation, red, green, blue, and skin tone. *3 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set (= 90). Shooting Tab AF Frame (= 110) Face AiAF*1 / / / / Tracking AF / / / / / / / / / / / / / Center / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / AF Frame Size (= 110)*2 Normal / / / / / / 231 ç Contents Small / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Digital Zoom (= 64) Standard / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 1.6x/2.0x / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / / AF-Point Zoom (= 76) On / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / Servo AF (= 114) On / / / / 232 ç Contents Off* 3 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Continuous AF (= 115) On / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / AF-assist Beam (= 79) On / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / Flash Settings (= 80) Red-Eye Lamp On/Off / / / / i-Contrast (= 103) Auto / / / / 233 ç Contents Off / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Review image after shooting (= 81) Display Time Off/Quick/2 sec./4 sec./8 sec./Hold / / / / Display Info Off/Detailed / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Blink Detection (= 77) On / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Off / / / Grid Lines (= 75) On/Off / / / / 234 ç Contents IS Settings (= 121) IS Mode Continuous/Off / / / / Shoot Only / / / / / / / / / / / / / / Dynamic IS 1 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 2 / / / Date Stamp (= 69) Off / / / / / Date / Date & Time / / / / / *1 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode. *2 Available when the AF frame is set to [Center]. ] mode. *3 [On] when subject movement is detected in [ 235 ç Contents Set Up Tab Item Ref. Page Mute = 163 Volume = 164 Hints & Tips = 164 Date/Time = 31 Time Zone = 165 Lens Retraction = 166 Eco Mode = 167 Power Saving = 44, = 168 LCD Brightness = 169 Start-up Image = 169 Format = 170, = 171 File Numbering = 172 Create Folder = 173 Video System = 182 Eye-Fi Settings = 208 Certification Logo Display = 174 Language = 34 Reset All = 175 236 ç Contents Playback Tab Item Ref. Page Slideshow = 133 Erase = 142 Protect = 137 Rotate = 147 Favorites = 150 Photobook Set-up = 205 i-Contrast = 157 Red-Eye Correction = 158 Cropping = 154 Resize = 152 My Colors = 156 Transition = 124 Scroll Display = 124 Auto Rotate = 149 Resume = 124 237 ç Contents Print Tab Item Print Ref. Page – Select Images & Qty. = 202 Select Range = 203 Select All Images = 203 Clear All Selections = 204 Print Settings = 200 Playback Mode FUNC. Menu Item Ref. Page Rotate = 147 Protect = 137 Favorites = 150 Print = 191 Play Movie = 124 Smart Shuffle = 135 Image Search = 130 Slideshow = 133 ç Contents 238 Handling Precautions ●● The camera is a high-precision electronic device. Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact. ●● Never bring the camera near magnets, motors, or other devices that generate strong electromagnetic fields, which may cause malfunction or erase image data. ●● If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen, wipe with a dry soft cloth, such as an eyeglass cloth. Do not rub hard or apply force. ●● Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or screen. ●● Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens. If cleaning is difficult, contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk. ●● To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden temperature changes (when the camera is transferred from cold to warm environments), put the camera in an airtight, resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag. ●● If condensation does form on the camera, stop using it immediately. Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it. Remove the battery pack and memory card, and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use. ●● Before long-term battery storage, use up the battery pack’s remaining charge, remove it from the camera, and store it in a plastic bag or similar container. Storing a partially charged battery pack over extended periods (about a year) may shorten its life or affect performance. 239 ç Contents Specifications Camera Specifications Camera Effective Pixels (Max.) Lens Focal Length LCD Monitor File Format Data Type Interface Power Source Dimensions (Based on CIPA Guidelines) Approx. 20.0 million pixels 40x zoom: 4.3 (W) – 172.0 (T) mm (35mm film equivalent: 24 (W) – 960 (T) mm) 3.0-type color TFT LCD Effective Pixels: Approx. 230,000 dots Design rule for Camera File system, DPOF (version 1.1) compliant Still Images: Exif 2.3 (JPEG) Movies: MOV (Video: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264; Audio: Linear PCM (monaural)) Hi-speed USB Analog audio output (monaural) Analog video output (NTSC/PAL) Battery Pack NB-11LH AC Adapter Kit ACK-DC90 104.4 x 69.1 x 85.1 mm (4.11 x 2.72 x 3.35 in.) Approx. 325 g (approx. 11.5 oz.; including Weight (Based on the battery pack and memory card) CIPA Guidelines) Approx. 308 g (approx. 10.9 oz.; camera body only) 240 ç Contents Digital Zoom Focal Length (35mm film equivalent) Digital Zoom [Standard] Digital Tele-Converter 1.6x Digital Tele-Converter 2.0x 24 – 3840 mm (Represents the combined focal length of optical and digital zoom.) 38.4 ‒ 1536 mm 48.0 – 1920 mm Number of Shots/Recording Time, Playback Time Number of Shots Approx. 185 Number of Shots (Eco Mode On) Movie Recording Time*1 Movie Recording Time (Continuous Shooting*2) Playback Time Approx. 245 Approx. 45 minutes Approx. 1 hour 35 minutes Approx. 4 hours *1 Times are under the following shooting conditions. - AUTO mode - Image quality [ ] - Repeated shooting, stopping, zooming, turning power on/off *2 Times are under the following shooting conditions. - AUTO mode - Image quality [ ] - No operations such as zooming - Shooting immediately resumed after automatically stopping when the file size reaches 4 GB or the recording time reaches 29 min. 59 sec *3 Time for still images played back in a slideshow. ●● The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the Camera & Imaging Products Association (CIPA). 241 ç Contents ●● Under some shooting conditions, the number of shots and recording time may be less than mentioned above. ●● Number of shots/time with a fully charged battery pack. Number of Shots per Memory Card The number of shots at an aspect ratio (= 72) of 4:3 per memory card is as follows. Note that the number of shots available varies by aspect ratio. Recording Pixels Compression Ratio Number of Shots per Memory Card (Approx. shots) 16 GB (Large) 20M/ 5152x3864 1698 (Medium 1) 10M/ 3648x2736 3217 (Medium 2) 3M/2048x1536 (Small) 0.3M/640x480 2760 5061 9344 16755 53992 80988 ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. 242 ç Contents Recording Time per Memory Card Recording Time per Memory Card 16 GB Image Quality 2 hr. 21 min. 58 sec. 6 hr. 44 min. 38 sec. ●● The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject, memory card and camera settings. ●● Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB, or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in [ ], or approximately 1 hour when shooting in [ ]. ●● Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some memory cards. SD Speed Class 2 or higher memory cards are recommended. Flash Range Maximum wide angle ( Maximum telephoto ( ) ) 50 cm – 5.0 m (1.6 – 16 ft.) 1.4 – 2.7 m (4.6 – 8.9 ft.) 243 ç Contents Shooting Range Shooting Focusing Maximum Wide Mode Range Angle ( ) – 0 cm (0 in.) – infinity Maximum Telephoto ( ) 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity 5 cm (2.0 in.) – infinity 1.4 m (4.6 ft.) – infinity Other modes * 0 – 50 cm (0 in. – 1.6 ft.) * 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) – infinity 3.0 m (9.8 ft.) – infinity – Not available in some shooting modes. Continuous Shooting Speed Shooting Mode Speed Approx. 0.5 shots/sec. Approx. 2.2 shots/sec. Shutter Speed [ ] mode, automatically set range 1 – 1/4000 sec. Aperture f/number f/3.5 – f/8.0 (W), f/6.3 – f/8.0 (T) ç Contents 244 Battery Pack NB-11LH Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Nominal Voltage: 3.6 V DC Nominal Capacity: 800 mAh Charging Cycles: Approx. 300 times Operating Temperatures: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F) Battery Charger CB-2LF/CB-2LFE Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) Rated Output: 4.2 V DC, 0.41 A Charging Time: Approx. 2 hr. 20 min. (when using NB-11LH) Charge Indicator: Charging: orange / Fully charged: green (two-indicator system) Operating Temperatures: 5 – 40 °C (41 – 104 °F) 245 ç Contents Index A AC adapter kit................. 180, 184 C Accessories............................ 179 Camera Reset all.......................... 175 AE lock................................... 100 CameraWindow (computer)... 186 AF frames................................110 Center (AF frame mode).........110 AF lock....................................116 Clock........................................ 52 Aspect ratio.............................. 72 Color (white balance)............. 104 AUTO mode (shooting mode)............... 36, 54 Compression ratio (image quality)..................... 120 AV cable......................... 181, 182 B Batteries → Date/time (date/time battery) Power saving..................... 44 Battery charger................... 2, 179 Battery pack Charging............................ 26 Eco mode........................ 167 Level................................ 222 Power saving..................... 44 Cropping......................... 154, 195 Custom white balance............ 105 D Date/time Adding date stamps.......... 69 Changing........................... 32 Date/time battery............... 33 Settings............................. 31 World clock...................... 165 DC coupler............................. 184 Defaults → Reset all Black and white images.......... 106 Digital tele-converter.............. 109 Blink detection.......................... 77 Digital zoom.............................. 64 Display language...................... 34 246 ç Contents DPOF...................................... 200 E Eco mode............................... 167 Editing Cropping.......................... 154 i-Contrast......................... 157 My Colors........................ 156 Red-eye correction.......... 158 Resizing images.............. 152 Erasing................................... 142 Erasing all............................... 146 Error messages...................... 218 Exposure AE lock............................ 100 Compensation................... 99 FE lock.............................119 Eye-Fi cards....................... 3, 208 F Face AiAF (AF frame mode).................. 111 Face self-timer (shooting mode)..................... 93 Favorites................................. 150 FE lock....................................119 File numbering........................ 172 Fireworks (shooting mode)....... 86 Fish-eye effect (shooting mode)..................... 88 Flash Off....................................118 On....................................118 Slow synchro....................118 Focusing AF frames.........................110 AF lock.............................116 AF-point zoom................... 76 Servo AF..........................114 Focusing range Infinity.............................. 109 Macro.............................. 108 Focus lock............................... 111 FUNC. menu Basic operations................ 47 Table........................ 227, 237 G Grid lines.................................. 75 H Household power................... 184 247 ç Contents I i-Contrast........................ 103, 157 Image quality → Compression ratio (image quality) Images Display period................... 81 Erasing............................ 142 Playback → Viewing Protecting........................ 137 Image stabilization.................. 121 Indicator.................................... 51 Infinity (focusing range).......... 109 ISO speed.............................. 102 L Lamp........................................ 80 Live View Control (shooting mode)..................... 84 Long shutter (shooting mode).. 95 Low light (shooting mode)........ 85 M Macro (focusing range).......... 108 Magnified display.................... 132 Memory cards............................. 3 Recording time................ 242 Menu Basic operations................ 49 Table................................ 225 Metering method.................... 101 Miniature effect (shooting mode)..................... 89 Monochrome (shooting mode)..................... 92 Movies Editing............................. 160 Image quality (resolution/frame rate).... 74 Recording time................ 242 My Colors....................... 105, 156 P P (shooting mode).................... 98 Package contents....................... 2 Photobook set-up................... 205 PictBridge....................... 181, 191 Playback → Viewing Portrait (shooting mode)........... 85 Poster effect (shooting mode)..................... 87 Power..................................... 179 → AC adapter kit → Battery charger → Battery pack 248 ç Contents Power saving............................ 44 Sepia tone images.................. 106 Printing................................... 191 Servo AF..................................114 Program AE.............................. 98 Shooting Shooting date/time → Date/time Shooting information....... 221 Protecting............................... 137 R Red-eye correction................. 158 Reset all................................. 175 Resizing images..................... 152 Resolution (image size)............ 73 Rotating.................................. 147 S Saving images to a computer........................... 188 Slideshow............................... 133 Smart Shuffle.......................... 135 Snow (shooting mode)............. 86 Software Installation....................... 187 Saving images to a computer................... 188 Sounds................................... 163 Strap..................................... 2, 25 Super vivid (shooting mode)..... 87 Screen Display language............... 34 Icons........................ 221, 223 Menu → FUNC. menu Terminal.......................... 183, 192 SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards → Memory cards Toy camera effect (shooting mode)..................... 91 Searching............................... 130 Tracking AF.............................112 Self-timer.................................. 66 2-second self-timer............ 67 Customizing the self-timer........................ 68 Face self-timer (shooting mode)............. 93 Traveling with the camera...... 165 T Troubleshooting...................... 212 TV display............................... 182 ç Contents V Viewing..................................... 39 Image search.................. 130 Index display................... 129 Magnified display............ 132 Single-image display......... 39 Slideshow........................ 133 Smart Shuffle.................. 135 TV display....................... 182 W White balance (color)............. 104 World clock............................. 165 Wrist strap → Strap Z Zoom............................ 37, 55, 64 249 ç Contents 250 Trademarks and Licensing ●● Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries. ●● Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. ●● The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC. ●● All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. ●● This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft. ●● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard. Disclaimer ●● Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited. ●● All measurements based on Canon testing standards. ●● Information subject to change without notice, as are product specifications and appearance. ●● Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment. ●● The above items notwithstanding, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss arising from the use of this product.-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
-
175
-
176
-
177
-
178
-
179
-
180
-
181
-
182
-
183
-
184
-
185
-
186
-
187
-
188
-
189
-
190
-
191
-
192
-
193
-
194
-
195
-
196
-
197
-
198
-
199
-
200
-
201
-
202
-
203
-
204
-
205
-
206
-
207
-
208
-
209
-
210
-
211
-
212
-
213
-
214
-
215
-
216
-
217
-
218
-
219
-
220
-
221
-
222
-
223
-
224
-
225
-
226
-
227
-
228
-
229
-
230
-
231
-
232
-
233
-
234
-
235
-
236
-
237
-
238
-
239
-
240
-
241
-
242
-
243
-
244
-
245
-
246
-
247
-
248
-
249
-
250
Canon 0107C001 Handleiding
- Categorie
- Camcorders
- Type
- Handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Canon 0107C001 User manual
Gerelateerde artikelen
-
Canon PowerShot SX540 HS de handleiding
-
Canon SX610 Handleiding
-
Canon Powershot SX710HS Handleiding
-
-
Canon SELPHY CP760 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Andere documenten
-
Sony DSC-WX500 de handleiding
-
Lexmark 4300 Handleiding
-
Panasonic DMCLX100EB de handleiding
-
Olympus Stylus100wide de handleiding
-
Panasonic DMC-TZ61 de handleiding
-
Samsung Galaxy Tab S4 Handleiding
-
-
Samsung Galaxy A40 Handleiding
-
-